2013-02-06 Sandra Loosemore <sandra@codesourcery.com>
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
4 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
6 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/tc-*.c
10 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11 @c in config/obj-*.c
12 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13 @c %**start of header
14 @setfilename as.info
15 @c ---config---
16 @macro gcctabopt{body}
17 @code{\body\}
18 @end macro
19 @c defaults, config file may override:
20 @set have-stabs
21 @c ---
22 @c man begin NAME
23 @c ---
24 @include asconfig.texi
25 @include bfdver.texi
26 @c ---
27 @c man end
28 @c ---
29 @c common OR combinations of conditions
30 @ifset COFF
31 @set COFF-ELF
32 @end ifset
33 @ifset ELF
34 @set COFF-ELF
35 @end ifset
36 @ifset AOUT
37 @set aout-bout
38 @end ifset
39 @ifset ARM/Thumb
40 @set ARM
41 @end ifset
42 @ifset Blackfin
43 @set Blackfin
44 @end ifset
45 @ifset BOUT
46 @set aout-bout
47 @end ifset
48 @ifset H8/300
49 @set H8
50 @end ifset
51 @ifset SH
52 @set H8
53 @end ifset
54 @ifset HPPA
55 @set abnormal-separator
56 @end ifset
57 @c ------------
58 @ifset GENERIC
59 @settitle Using @value{AS}
60 @end ifset
61 @ifclear GENERIC
62 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63 @end ifclear
64 @setchapternewpage odd
65 @c %**end of header
66
67 @c @smallbook
68 @c @set SMALL
69 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73 @c
74 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77 @c break.
78 @c
79 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
81 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
83 @c discretion, of course.
84 @ifinfo
85 @set SMALL
86 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
88 @end ifinfo
89
90 @ifnottex
91 @dircategory Software development
92 @direntry
93 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
94 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
95 @end direntry
96 @end ifnottex
97
98 @finalout
99 @syncodeindex ky cp
100
101 @copying
102 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
104 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107 Inc.
108
109 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
114 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
116 @c man end
117 @end copying
118
119 @titlepage
120 @title Using @value{AS}
121 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122 @ifclear GENERIC
123 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124 @end ifclear
125 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126 @sp 1
127 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128 @end ifset
129 @sp 1
130 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131 @sp 1
132 @sp 13
133 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137 distracting the boss while they got some work
138 done.
139 @sp 3
140 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141 @page
142 @tex
143 {\parskip=0pt
144 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146 }
147 %"boxit" macro for figures:
148 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153 @end tex
154
155 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158 Inc.
159
160 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
165 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
167 @end titlepage
168 @contents
169
170 @ifnottex
171 @node Top
172 @top Using @value{AS}
173
174 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177 @end ifset
178 version @value{VERSION}.
179 @ifclear GENERIC
180 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182 @end ifclear
183
184 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
186 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
188 @menu
189 * Overview:: Overview
190 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
191 * Syntax:: Syntax
192 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
193 * Symbols:: Symbols
194 * Expressions:: Expressions
195 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
196 @ifset ELF
197 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
198 @end ifset
199 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
200 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
201 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
202 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
203 * AS Index:: AS Index
204 @end menu
205 @end ifnottex
206
207 @node Overview
208 @chapter Overview
209 @iftex
210 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211 @ifclear GENERIC
212 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214 @end ifclear
215 @end iftex
216
217 @cindex invocation summary
218 @cindex option summary
219 @cindex summary of options
220 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
221 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
223 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
225 @ignore
226 @c man begin SEEALSO
227 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228 @c man end
229 @end ignore
230
231 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
233 @smallexample
234 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
235 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
251 @c Add an empty line for separation.
252 @ifset AARCH64
253
254 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
255 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
256 @end ifset
257 @ifset ALPHA
258
259 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
260 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
261 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
262 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
263 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
264 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
265 @end ifset
266 @ifset ARC
267
268 @emph{Target ARC options:}
269 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
270 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
271 @end ifset
272 @ifset ARM
273
274 @emph{Target ARM options:}
275 @c Don't document the deprecated options
276 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
277 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
278 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
279 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
280 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
281 [@b{-mthumb}]
282 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
283 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
284 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
285 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
286 @end ifset
287 @ifset Blackfin
288
289 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
290 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
291 [@b{-mfdpic}]
292 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
293 [@b{-mnopic}]
294 @end ifset
295 @ifset CRIS
296
297 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
298 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
299 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
300 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
301 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
302 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
303 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D10V
306
307 @emph{Target D10V options:}
308 [@b{-O}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset D30V
311
312 @emph{Target D30V options:}
313 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset EPIPHANY
316
317 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
318 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset H8
321
322 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
323 [-h-tick-hex]
324 @end ifset
325 @ifset HPPA
326 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
327 @end ifset
328 @ifset I80386
329
330 @emph{Target i386 options:}
331 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
332 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I960
335
336 @emph{Target i960 options:}
337 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
338 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
339 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
340 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
341 @end ifset
342 @ifset IA64
343
344 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
345 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
346 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
347 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
348 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
349 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
350 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
351 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset IP2K
354
355 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
356 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32C
359
360 @emph{Target M32C options:}
361 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
362 @end ifset
363 @ifset M32R
364
365 @emph{Target M32R options:}
366 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
367 @b{--W[n]p}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M680X0
370
371 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
372 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
373 @end ifset
374 @ifset M68HC11
375
376 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
377 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
378 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
379 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
380 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
381 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
382 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
383 @end ifset
384 @ifset MCORE
385
386 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
387 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
388 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset METAG
391
392 @emph{Target Meta options:}
393 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MICROBLAZE
396 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
397 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
398 @end ifset
399 @ifset MIPS
400
401 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
402 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
403 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
404 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
405 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
406 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
407 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
408 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
409 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
419 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
420 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
421 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
422 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
423 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
424 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
425 @end ifset
426 @ifset MMIX
427
428 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
429 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
430 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
431 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
432 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
433 @end ifset
434 @ifset NIOSII
435
436 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
437 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
438 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
439 @end ifset
440 @ifset PDP11
441
442 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
443 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
444 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
445 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
446 @end ifset
447 @ifset PJ
448
449 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
450 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
451 @end ifset
452 @ifset PPC
453
454 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
455 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
456 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
457 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
458 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
459 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
460 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
461 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
462 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
463 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
464 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
465 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
466 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset RX
469
470 @emph{Target RX options:}
471 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
472 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
473 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
474 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
475 [@b{-mpid}]
476 [@b{-mrelax}]
477 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
478 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
479 @end ifset
480 @ifset S390
481
482 @emph{Target s390 options:}
483 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
484 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
485 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
486 @end ifset
487 @ifset SCORE
488
489 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
490 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
491 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
492 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
493 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
494 @end ifset
495 @ifset SPARC
496
497 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
498 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
499 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
500 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
501 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
502 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
503 @end ifset
504 @ifset TIC54X
505
506 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
507 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
508 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
509 @end ifset
510
511 @ifset TIC6X
512
513 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
514 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
515 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
516 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
517 @end ifset
518 @ifset TILEGX
519
520 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
521 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
522 @end ifset
523 @ifset TILEPRO
524 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
525 @end ifset
526
527 @ifset XTENSA
528
529 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
530 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
531 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
532 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
533 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
534 @end ifset
535
536 @ifset Z80
537
538 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
539 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
540 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
541 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
542 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
543 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
544 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
545 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
546 @end ifset
547
548 @ifset Z8000
549 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
550 @end ifset
551
552 @c man end
553 @end smallexample
554
555 @c man begin OPTIONS
556
557 @table @gcctabopt
558 @include at-file.texi
559
560 @item -a[cdghlmns]
561 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
562
563 @table @gcctabopt
564 @item -ac
565 omit false conditionals
566
567 @item -ad
568 omit debugging directives
569
570 @item -ag
571 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
572
573 @item -ah
574 include high-level source
575
576 @item -al
577 include assembly
578
579 @item -am
580 include macro expansions
581
582 @item -an
583 omit forms processing
584
585 @item -as
586 include symbols
587
588 @item =file
589 set the name of the listing file
590 @end table
591
592 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
593 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
594 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
595
596 @item --alternate
597 Begin in alternate macro mode.
598 @ifclear man
599 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
600 @end ifclear
601
602 @item --compress-debug-sections
603 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
604 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
605 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
606
607 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
608 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
609
610 @item -D
611 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
612 other assemblers.
613
614 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
615 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
616 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
617
618 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
619 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
620 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
621 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
622 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
623 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
624
625 @item -f
626 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
627 compiler output).
628
629 @item -g
630 @itemx --gen-debug
631 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
632 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
633 ECOFF or DWARF2.
634
635 @item --gstabs
636 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
637 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
638
639 @item --gstabs+
640 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
641 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
642 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
643 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
644 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
645
646 @item --gdwarf-2
647 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
648 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
649 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
650
651 @item --size-check=error
652 @itemx --size-check=warning
653 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
654
655 @item --help
656 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
657
658 @item --target-help
659 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
660
661 @item -I @var{dir}
662 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
663
664 @item -J
665 Don't warn about signed overflow.
666
667 @item -K
668 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
669 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
670 @end ifclear
671 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
672 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
673 @end ifset
674
675 @item -L
676 @itemx --keep-locals
677 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
678 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
679 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
680 @ifclear man
681 @xref{Symbol Names}.
682 @end ifclear
683
684 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
685 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
686 listing to @var{number}.
687
688 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
689 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
690 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
691
692 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
693 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
694 @var{number} bytes.
695
696 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
697 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
698 to @var{number} + 1.
699
700 @item -o @var{objfile}
701 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
702
703 @item -R
704 Fold the data section into the text section.
705
706 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
707 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
708 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
709 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
710 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
711 requirements at the expense of speed.
712
713 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
714 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
715 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
716 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
717
718 @item --statistics
719 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
720 assembly.
721
722 @item --strip-local-absolute
723 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
724
725 @item -v
726 @itemx -version
727 Print the @command{as} version.
728
729 @item --version
730 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
731
732 @item -W
733 @itemx --no-warn
734 Suppress warning messages.
735
736 @item --fatal-warnings
737 Treat warnings as errors.
738
739 @item --warn
740 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
741
742 @item -w
743 Ignored.
744
745 @item -x
746 Ignored.
747
748 @item -Z
749 Generate an object file even after errors.
750
751 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
752 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
753
754 @end table
755 @c man end
756
757 @ifset AARCH64
758
759 @ifclear man
760 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
761 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
762 @end ifclear
763
764 @ifset man
765 @c man begin OPTIONS
766 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
767 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
768 @c man end
769 @c man begin INCLUDE
770 @include c-aarch64.texi
771 @c ended inside the included file
772 @end ifset
773
774 @end ifset
775
776 @ifset ALPHA
777
778 @ifclear man
779 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
780 for an Alpha processor.
781 @end ifclear
782
783 @ifset man
784 @c man begin OPTIONS
785 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
786 processor.
787 @c man end
788 @c man begin INCLUDE
789 @include c-alpha.texi
790 @c ended inside the included file
791 @end ifset
792
793 @end ifset
794
795 @c man begin OPTIONS
796 @ifset ARC
797 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
798 an ARC processor.
799
800 @table @gcctabopt
801 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
802 This option selects the core processor variant.
803 @item -EB | -EL
804 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
805 @end table
806 @end ifset
807
808 @ifset ARM
809 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
810 processor family.
811
812 @table @gcctabopt
813 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
814 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
815 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
816 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
817 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
818 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
819 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
820 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
821 @item -mthumb
822 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
823 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
824 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
825 @item -EB | -EL
826 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
827 @item -mthumb-interwork
828 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
829 ARM code in mind.
830 @item -k
831 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
832 @end table
833 @end ifset
834 @c man end
835
836 @ifset Blackfin
837
838 @ifclear man
839 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
840 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
841 @end ifclear
842
843 @ifset man
844 @c man begin OPTIONS
845 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
846 the Blackfin processor family.
847 @c man end
848 @c man begin INCLUDE
849 @include c-bfin.texi
850 @c ended inside the included file
851 @end ifset
852
853 @end ifset
854
855 @c man begin OPTIONS
856 @ifset CRIS
857 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
858 @end ifset
859
860 @ifset D10V
861 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
862 a D10V processor.
863 @table @gcctabopt
864 @cindex D10V optimization
865 @cindex optimization, D10V
866 @item -O
867 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
868 @end table
869 @end ifset
870
871 @ifset D30V
872 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
873 processor.
874 @table @gcctabopt
875 @cindex D30V optimization
876 @cindex optimization, D30V
877 @item -O
878 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
879
880 @cindex D30V nops
881 @item -n
882 Warn when nops are generated.
883
884 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
885 @item -N
886 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
887 @end table
888 @end ifset
889 @c man end
890
891 @ifset EPIPHANY
892 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
893 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
894
895 @ifclear man
896 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
897 configured for an Epiphany processor.
898 @end ifclear
899
900 @ifset man
901 @c man begin OPTIONS
902 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
903 an Epiphany processor.
904 @c man end
905 @c man begin INCLUDE
906 @include c-epiphany.texi
907 @c ended inside the included file
908 @end ifset
909
910 @end ifset
911
912 @ifset I80386
913
914 @ifclear man
915 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
916 configured for an i386 processor.
917 @end ifclear
918
919 @ifset man
920 @c man begin OPTIONS
921 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
922 an i386 processor.
923 @c man end
924 @c man begin INCLUDE
925 @include c-i386.texi
926 @c ended inside the included file
927 @end ifset
928
929 @end ifset
930
931 @c man begin OPTIONS
932 @ifset I960
933 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
934 Intel 80960 processor.
935
936 @table @gcctabopt
937 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
938 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
939
940 @item -b
941 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
942
943 @item -no-relax
944 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
945 error if necessary.
946
947 @end table
948 @end ifset
949
950 @ifset IP2K
951 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
952 Ubicom IP2K series.
953
954 @table @gcctabopt
955
956 @item -mip2022ext
957 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
958
959 @item -mip2022
960 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
961 just the basic IP2022 ones.
962
963 @end table
964 @end ifset
965
966 @ifset M32C
967 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
968 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
969
970 @table @gcctabopt
971
972 @item -m32c
973 Assemble M32C instructions.
974
975 @item -m16c
976 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
977
978 @item -relax
979 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
980
981 @item -h-tick-hex
982 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
983
984 @end table
985 @end ifset
986
987 @ifset M32R
988 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
989 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
990
991 @table @gcctabopt
992
993 @item --m32rx
994 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
995 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
996
997 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
998 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
999 encountered.
1000
1001 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1002 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1003 encountered.
1004
1005 @end table
1006 @end ifset
1007
1008 @ifset M680X0
1009 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1010 Motorola 68000 series.
1011
1012 @table @gcctabopt
1013
1014 @item -l
1015 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1016
1017 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1018 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1019 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1020 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1021 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1022
1023 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1024 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1025 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1026 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1027 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1028 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1029
1030 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1031 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1032 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1033
1034 @end table
1035 @end ifset
1036
1037 @ifset NIOSII
1038
1039 @ifclear man
1040 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1041 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1042 @end ifclear
1043
1044 @ifset man
1045 @c man begin OPTIONS
1046 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1047 Altera Nios II processor.
1048 @c man end
1049 @c man begin INCLUDE
1050 @include c-nios2.texi
1051 @c ended inside the included file
1052 @end ifset
1053 @end ifset
1054
1055 @ifset PDP11
1056
1057 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1058 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1059
1060 @table @gcctabopt
1061 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1062 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1063 default is @option{-mpic}.
1064
1065 @item -mall
1066 @itemx -mall-extensions
1067 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1068
1069 @item -mno-extensions
1070 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1071
1072 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1073 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1074
1075 @item -m@var{cpu}
1076 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1077 disable all other extensions.
1078
1079 @item -m@var{machine}
1080 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1081 model, and disable all other extensions.
1082 @end table
1083
1084 @end ifset
1085
1086 @ifset PJ
1087 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1088 a picoJava processor.
1089
1090 @table @gcctabopt
1091
1092 @cindex PJ endianness
1093 @cindex endianness, PJ
1094 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1095 @item -mb
1096 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1097
1098 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1099 @item -ml
1100 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1101
1102 @end table
1103 @end ifset
1104
1105 @ifset M68HC11
1106 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1107 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1108
1109 @table @gcctabopt
1110
1111 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1112 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1113 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1114
1115 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1116 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1117 XGATE address space.
1118
1119 @item -mshort
1120 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1121
1122 @item -mlong
1123 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1124
1125 @item -mshort-double
1126 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1127
1128 @item -mlong-double
1129 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1130
1131 @item --force-long-branches
1132 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1133 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1134 sub routine.
1135
1136 @item -S | --short-branches
1137 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1138 when the offset is out of range.
1139
1140 @item --strict-direct-mode
1141 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1142 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1143
1144 @item --print-insn-syntax
1145 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1146
1147 @item --print-opcodes
1148 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1149
1150 @item --generate-example
1151 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1152 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1153
1154 @end table
1155 @end ifset
1156
1157 @ifset SPARC
1158 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1159 for the SPARC architecture:
1160
1161 @table @gcctabopt
1162 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1163 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1164 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1165
1166 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1167 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1168
1169 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1170 UltraSPARC extensions.
1171
1172 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1173 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1174 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1175
1176 @item -bump
1177 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1178 @end table
1179 @end ifset
1180
1181 @ifset TIC54X
1182 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1183 architecture.
1184
1185 @table @gcctabopt
1186 @item -mfar-mode
1187 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1188 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1189 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1190 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1191 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1192 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1193 behaviour in the shell.
1194 @end table
1195 @end ifset
1196
1197 @ifset MIPS
1198 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1199 a @sc{mips} processor.
1200
1201 @table @gcctabopt
1202 @item -G @var{num}
1203 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1204 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1205 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1206
1207 @cindex MIPS endianness
1208 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1209 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1210 @item -EB
1211 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1212
1213 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1214 @item -EL
1215 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1216
1217 @cindex MIPS ISA
1218 @item -mips1
1219 @itemx -mips2
1220 @itemx -mips3
1221 @itemx -mips4
1222 @itemx -mips5
1223 @itemx -mips32
1224 @itemx -mips32r2
1225 @itemx -mips64
1226 @itemx -mips64r2
1227 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1228 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1229 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1230 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1231 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1232 @samp{-mips64r2}
1233 correspond to generic
1234 @samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1235 and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1236 ISA processors, respectively.
1237
1238 @item -march=@var{CPU}
1239 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1240
1241 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1242 Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1243
1244 @item -mfix7000
1245 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1246 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1247 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1248
1249 @item -mdebug
1250 @itemx -no-mdebug
1251 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1252 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1253
1254 @item -mpdr
1255 @itemx -mno-pdr
1256 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1257
1258 @item -mgp32
1259 @itemx -mfp32
1260 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1261 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1262 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1263 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1264
1265 @item -mips16
1266 @itemx -no-mips16
1267 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1268 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1269 turns off this option.
1270
1271 @item -mmicromips
1272 @itemx -mno-micromips
1273 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1274 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1275 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1276 at the start of the assembly file.
1277
1278 @item -msmartmips
1279 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1280 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1281 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1282 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1283
1284 @item -mips3d
1285 @itemx -no-mips3d
1286 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1287 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1288 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1289
1290 @item -mdmx
1291 @itemx -no-mdmx
1292 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1293 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1294 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1295
1296 @item -mdsp
1297 @itemx -mno-dsp
1298 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1299 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1300 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1301
1302 @item -mdspr2
1303 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1304 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1305 This option implies -mdsp.
1306 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1307 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1308
1309 @item -mmt
1310 @itemx -mno-mt
1311 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1312 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1313 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1314
1315 @item -mmcu
1316 @itemx -mno-mcu
1317 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1318 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1319 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1320
1321 @item --construct-floats
1322 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1323 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1324 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1325 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1326 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1327 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1328
1329 @cindex emulation
1330 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1331 This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1332 for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1333 between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1334 debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1335 endianness. The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1336 @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1337 @samp{mipsbelf}. The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1338 of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1339 the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1340 in the name. Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1341 selection in any case.
1342
1343 This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1344 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1345 Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1346 @samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1347 the other format, if both are to be available. For example, the Irix 5
1348 configuration includes support for both.
1349
1350 Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1351 fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1352 more processors.
1353
1354 @item -nocpp
1355 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1356 the native tools.
1357
1358 @item --trap
1359 @itemx --no-trap
1360 @itemx --break
1361 @itemx --no-break
1362 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1363 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1364 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1365 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1366 break exception.
1367
1368 @item -n
1369 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1370 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1371 @end table
1372 @end ifset
1373
1374 @ifset MCORE
1375 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1376 an MCore processor.
1377
1378 @table @gcctabopt
1379 @item -jsri2bsr
1380 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1381 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1382 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1383
1384 @item -sifilter
1385 @itemx -nosifilter
1386 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1387 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1388
1389 @item -relax
1390 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1391
1392 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1393 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1394 can be assembled.
1395
1396 @item -EB
1397 Assemble for a big endian target.
1398
1399 @item -EL
1400 Assemble for a little endian target.
1401
1402 @end table
1403 @end ifset
1404 @c man end
1405
1406 @ifset METAG
1407
1408 @ifclear man
1409 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1410 for a Meta processor.
1411 @end ifclear
1412
1413 @ifset man
1414 @c man begin OPTIONS
1415 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1416 Meta processor.
1417 @c man end
1418 @c man begin INCLUDE
1419 @include c-metag.texi
1420 @c ended inside the included file
1421 @end ifset
1422
1423 @end ifset
1424
1425 @c man begin OPTIONS
1426 @ifset MMIX
1427 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1428 @end ifset
1429
1430 @c man end
1431 @ifset PPC
1432
1433 @ifclear man
1434 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1435 for a PowerPC processor.
1436 @end ifclear
1437
1438 @ifset man
1439 @c man begin OPTIONS
1440 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1441 PowerPC processor.
1442 @c man end
1443 @c man begin INCLUDE
1444 @include c-ppc.texi
1445 @c ended inside the included file
1446 @end ifset
1447
1448 @end ifset
1449
1450 @c man begin OPTIONS
1451 @ifset RX
1452 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1453 @end ifset
1454
1455 @ifset S390
1456 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1457 processor family.
1458
1459 @table @gcctabopt
1460 @item -m31
1461 @itemx -m64
1462 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1463 @item -mesa
1464 @item -mzarch
1465 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1466 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1467 @item -march=@var{processor}
1468 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1469 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1470 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1471 @item -mregnames
1472 @itemx -mno-regnames
1473 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1474 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1475 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1476 but evaluates to zero.
1477 @end table
1478 @end ifset
1479 @c man end
1480
1481 @ifset TIC6X
1482
1483 @ifclear man
1484 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1485 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1486 @end ifclear
1487
1488 @ifset man
1489 @c man begin OPTIONS
1490 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1491 TMS320C6000 processor.
1492 @c man end
1493 @c man begin INCLUDE
1494 @include c-tic6x.texi
1495 @c ended inside the included file
1496 @end ifset
1497
1498 @end ifset
1499
1500 @ifset TILEGX
1501
1502 @ifclear man
1503 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1504 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1505 @end ifclear
1506
1507 @ifset man
1508 @c man begin OPTIONS
1509 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1510 processor.
1511 @c man end
1512 @c man begin INCLUDE
1513 @include c-tilegx.texi
1514 @c ended inside the included file
1515 @end ifset
1516
1517 @end ifset
1518
1519 @ifset XTENSA
1520
1521 @ifclear man
1522 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1523 for an Xtensa processor.
1524 @end ifclear
1525
1526 @ifset man
1527 @c man begin OPTIONS
1528 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1529 Xtensa processor.
1530 @c man end
1531 @c man begin INCLUDE
1532 @include c-xtensa.texi
1533 @c ended inside the included file
1534 @end ifset
1535
1536 @end ifset
1537
1538 @c man begin OPTIONS
1539
1540 @ifset Z80
1541 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1542 a Z80 family processor.
1543 @table @gcctabopt
1544 @item -z80
1545 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1546 @item -r800
1547 Assemble for R800 processor.
1548 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1549 @itemx -Wnud
1550 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1551 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1552 @itemx -Wnup
1553 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1554 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1555 @itemx -Wud
1556 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1557 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1558 @itemx -Wup
1559 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1560 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1561 @itemx -Fud
1562 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1563 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1564 @itemx -Fup
1565 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1566 @end table
1567 @end ifset
1568
1569 @c man end
1570
1571 @menu
1572 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1573 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1574 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1575 * Command Line:: Command Line
1576 * Input Files:: Input Files
1577 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1578 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1579 @end menu
1580
1581 @node Manual
1582 @section Structure of this Manual
1583
1584 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1585 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1586 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1587 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1588 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1589
1590 @ifclear GENERIC
1591 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1592 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1593 @end ifclear
1594 @ifset GENERIC
1595 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1596 various flavors of the assembler.
1597 @end ifset
1598
1599 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1600 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1601 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1602 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1603 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1604 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1605 particular architecture.
1606 @ifset GENERIC
1607 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1608 machine architecture manual for this information.
1609 @end ifset
1610 @ifclear GENERIC
1611 @ifset H8/300
1612 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1613 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1614 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1615 @end ifset
1616 @ifset SH
1617 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1618 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1619 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1620 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1621 @end ifset
1622 @ifset Z8000
1623 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1624 @end ifset
1625 @end ifclear
1626
1627 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1628 @ignore
1629 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1630 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1631 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1632 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1633 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1634 qualification.
1635
1636 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1637 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1638 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1639 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1640 @end ignore
1641
1642 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1643 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1644 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1645 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1646 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1647 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1648 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1649 @c directives).
1650
1651 @node GNU Assembler
1652 @section The GNU Assembler
1653
1654 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1655
1656 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1657 @ifclear GENERIC
1658 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1659 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1660 @end ifclear
1661 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1662 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1663 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1664 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1665 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1666
1667 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1668 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1669 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1670 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1671 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1672 machine would assemble.
1673 @ifset VAX
1674 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1675 @end ifset
1676 @ifset M680X0
1677 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1678 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1679 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1680 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1681 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1682 @end ifset
1683
1684 @c man end
1685
1686 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1687 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1688 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1689
1690 @node Object Formats
1691 @section Object File Formats
1692
1693 @cindex object file format
1694 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1695 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1696 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1697 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1698 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1699 @ifclear GENERIC
1700 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1701 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1702 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1703 @end ifclear
1704 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1705 @ifset I960
1706 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1707 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1708 @end ifset
1709 @ifset HPPA
1710 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1711 SOM or ELF format object files.
1712 @end ifset
1713 @end ifclear
1714
1715 @node Command Line
1716 @section Command Line
1717
1718 @cindex command line conventions
1719
1720 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1721 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1722 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1723 significant.
1724
1725 @cindex standard input, as input file
1726 @kindex --
1727 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1728 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1729
1730 @cindex options, command line
1731 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1732 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1733 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1734 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1735 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1736
1737 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1738 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1739 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1740 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1741
1742 @smallexample
1743 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1744 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1745 @end smallexample
1746
1747 @node Input Files
1748 @section Input Files
1749
1750 @cindex input
1751 @cindex source program
1752 @cindex files, input
1753 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1754 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1755 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1756 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1757
1758 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1759 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1760 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1761 order specified.
1762
1763 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1764 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1765 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1766 (The standard input is also a file.)
1767
1768 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1769 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1770 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1771 is taken to be an input file name.
1772
1773 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1774 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1775 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1776 to assemble.
1777
1778 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1779 in your command line.
1780
1781 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1782 file.
1783
1784 @c man end
1785
1786 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1787
1788 @cindex input file linenumbers
1789 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1790 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1791 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1792 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1793 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1794
1795 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1796 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1797
1798 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1799 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1800 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1801 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1802 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1803 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1804
1805 @node Object
1806 @section Output (Object) File
1807
1808 @cindex object file
1809 @cindex output file
1810 @kindex a.out
1811 @kindex .o
1812 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1813 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1814 is the object file. Its default name is
1815 @ifclear BOUT
1816 @code{a.out}.
1817 @end ifclear
1818 @ifset BOUT
1819 @ifset GENERIC
1820 @code{a.out}, or
1821 @end ifset
1822 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1823 @end ifset
1824 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1825 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1826 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1827 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1828 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1829
1830 @cindex linker
1831 @kindex ld
1832 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1833 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1834 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1835 information for the debugger.
1836
1837 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1838 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1839
1840 @node Errors
1841 @section Error and Warning Messages
1842
1843 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1844
1845 @cindex error messages
1846 @cindex warning messages
1847 @cindex messages from assembler
1848 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1849 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1850 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1851 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1852 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1853
1854 @c man end
1855
1856 @cindex format of warning messages
1857 Warning messages have the format
1858
1859 @smallexample
1860 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1861 @end smallexample
1862
1863 @noindent
1864 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1865 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1866 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1867 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1868 @ifset GENERIC
1869 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1870 @end ifset
1871 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1872 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1873 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1874 tradition).
1875
1876 @cindex format of error messages
1877 Error messages have the format
1878 @smallexample
1879 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1880 @end smallexample
1881 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1882 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1883 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1884
1885 @node Invoking
1886 @chapter Command-Line Options
1887
1888 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1889 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1890 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1891 for options specific
1892 @ifclear GENERIC
1893 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1894 @end ifclear
1895 @ifset GENERIC
1896 to particular machine architectures.
1897 @end ifset
1898
1899 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1900
1901 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1902 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1903 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1904 by commas. For example:
1905
1906 @smallexample
1907 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1908 @end smallexample
1909
1910 @noindent
1911 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1912 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1913 local symbols in the symbol table).
1914
1915 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1916 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1917 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1918 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1919 assembler.)
1920
1921 @c man end
1922
1923 @menu
1924 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1925 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1926 * D:: -D for compatibility
1927 * f:: -f to work faster
1928 * I:: -I for .include search path
1929 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1930 * K:: -K for compatibility
1931 @end ifclear
1932 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1933 * K:: -K for difference tables
1934 @end ifset
1935
1936 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1937 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1938 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1939 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1940 * o:: -o to name the object file
1941 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1942 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1943 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1944 * v:: -v to announce version
1945 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1946 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1947 @end menu
1948
1949 @node a
1950 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1951
1952 @kindex -a
1953 @kindex -ac
1954 @kindex -ad
1955 @kindex -ag
1956 @kindex -ah
1957 @kindex -al
1958 @kindex -an
1959 @kindex -as
1960 @cindex listings, enabling
1961 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1962
1963 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1964 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1965 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1966 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1967 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1968 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1969 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1970 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1971 also.
1972
1973 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1974 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1975
1976 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
1977 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1978 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1979 omitted from the listing.
1980
1981 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1982 listing.
1983
1984 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1985 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1986 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1987 @code{.sbttl}.
1988 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1989 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1990 listing-control directives have no effect.
1991
1992 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1993 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1994
1995 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1996 because it
1997 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1998 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1999 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2000 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2001 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2002
2003 @node alternate
2004 @section @option{--alternate}
2005
2006 @kindex --alternate
2007 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2008
2009 @node D
2010 @section @option{-D}
2011
2012 @kindex -D
2013 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2014 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2015 @command{@value{AS}}.
2016
2017 @node f
2018 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2019
2020 @kindex -f
2021 @cindex trusted compiler
2022 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2023 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2024 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2025 and comment preprocessing on
2026 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2027 ,Preprocessing}.
2028
2029 @quotation
2030 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2031 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2032 not work correctly.
2033 @end quotation
2034
2035 @node I
2036 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2037
2038 @kindex -I @var{path}
2039 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2040 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2041 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2042 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2043 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2044 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2045 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2046 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2047 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2048 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2049
2050 @node K
2051 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2052
2053 @kindex -K
2054 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2055 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2056 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2057 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2058 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2059 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2060 alteration on other platforms.
2061 @end ifclear
2062
2063 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2064 @cindex difference tables, warning
2065 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2066 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2067 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2068 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2069 is done.
2070 @end ifset
2071
2072 @node L
2073 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2074
2075 @kindex -L
2076 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2077 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2078 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2079 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2080 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2081 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2082 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2083 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2084
2085 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2086 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2087 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2088
2089 @node listing
2090 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2091
2092 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2093 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2094 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2095 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2096 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2097 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2098 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2099 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2100
2101 @table @gcctabopt
2102 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2103 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2104 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2105 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2106 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2107
2108 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2109 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2110 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2111 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2112 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2113 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2114 switch is used the default is to one.
2115
2116 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2117 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2118 @cindex Width of source line output
2119 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2120 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2121 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2122
2123 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2124 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2125 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2126 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2127 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2128 @end table
2129
2130 @node M
2131 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2132
2133 @kindex -M
2134 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2135 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2136 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2137 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2138 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2139 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2140 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2141 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2142 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2143
2144 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2145 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2146 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2147 individually. These are:
2148
2149 @itemize @bullet
2150 @item global symbols in common section
2151
2152 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2153 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2154 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2155 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2156 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2157
2158 @item complex relocations
2159
2160 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2161 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2162 are not support by other object file formats.
2163
2164 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2165
2166 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2167 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2168 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2169 script.
2170
2171 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2172
2173 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2174 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2175
2176 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2177
2178 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2179 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2180 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2181 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2182 assigned within a linker script.
2183 @end itemize
2184
2185 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2186 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2187 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2188
2189 @itemize @bullet
2190
2191 @item EBCDIC strings
2192
2193 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2194
2195 @item packed binary coded decimal
2196
2197 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2198 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2199
2200 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2201
2202 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2203
2204 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2205
2206 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2207
2208 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2209
2210 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2211 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2212 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2213 these options serve no purpose.
2214
2215 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2216
2217 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2218 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2219 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2220
2221 @item other @code{OPT} options
2222
2223 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2224 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2225
2226 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2227
2228 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2229 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2230
2231 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2232
2233 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2234
2235 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2236
2237 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2238
2239 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2240
2241 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2242
2243 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2244
2245 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2246
2247 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2248
2249 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2250
2251 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2252
2253 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2254
2255 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2256
2257 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2258
2259 @end itemize
2260
2261 @node MD
2262 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2263
2264 @kindex --MD
2265 @cindex dependency tracking
2266 @cindex make rules
2267
2268 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2269 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2270 dependencies of the main source file.
2271
2272 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2273
2274 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2275
2276 @node o
2277 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2278
2279 @kindex -o
2280 @cindex naming object file
2281 @cindex object file name
2282 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2283 default it has the name
2284 @ifset GENERIC
2285 @ifset I960
2286 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2287 @end ifset
2288 @ifclear I960
2289 @file{a.out}.
2290 @end ifclear
2291 @end ifset
2292 @ifclear GENERIC
2293 @ifset I960
2294 @file{b.out}.
2295 @end ifset
2296 @ifclear I960
2297 @file{a.out}.
2298 @end ifclear
2299 @end ifclear
2300 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2301 object file a different name.
2302
2303 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2304 existing file of the same name.
2305
2306 @node R
2307 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2308
2309 @kindex -R
2310 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2311 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2312 @cindex joining text and data sections
2313 @cindex merging text and data sections
2314 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2315 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2316 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2317 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2318 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2319 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2320
2321 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2322 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2323 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2324 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2325
2326 @ifset COFF-ELF
2327 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2328 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2329 @samp{.data}.
2330 @end ifset
2331
2332 @ifset HPPA
2333 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2334 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2335 @end ifset
2336
2337 @node statistics
2338 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2339
2340 @kindex --statistics
2341 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2342 @cindex time, total for assembly
2343 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2344 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2345 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2346 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2347 seconds).
2348
2349 @node traditional-format
2350 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2351
2352 @kindex --traditional-format
2353 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2354 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2355 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2356
2357 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2358 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2359
2360 @node v
2361 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2362
2363 @kindex -v
2364 @kindex -version
2365 @cindex assembler version
2366 @cindex version of assembler
2367 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2368 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2369 command line.
2370
2371 @node W
2372 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2373
2374 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2375 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2376 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2377 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2378
2379 @kindex -W
2380 @kindex --no-warn
2381 @cindex suppressing warnings
2382 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2383 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2384 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2385 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2386 are still reported.
2387
2388 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2389 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2390 @cindex warnings, causing error
2391 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2392 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2393
2394 @kindex --warn
2395 @cindex warnings, switching on
2396 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2397 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2398
2399 @node Z
2400 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2401 @cindex object file, after errors
2402 @cindex errors, continuing after
2403 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2404 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2405 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2406 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2407 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2408 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2409
2410 @node Syntax
2411 @chapter Syntax
2412
2413 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2414 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2415 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2416 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2417 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2418 @ifclear VAX
2419 assembler.
2420 @end ifclear
2421 @ifset VAX
2422 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2423 @end ifset
2424
2425 @menu
2426 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2427 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2428 * Comments:: Comments
2429 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2430 * Statements:: Statements
2431 * Constants:: Constants
2432 @end menu
2433
2434 @node Preprocessing
2435 @section Preprocessing
2436
2437 @cindex preprocessing
2438 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2439 @itemize @bullet
2440 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2441 @item
2442 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2443 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2444 a single space.
2445
2446 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2447 @item
2448 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2449 appropriate number of newlines.
2450
2451 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2452 @item
2453 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2454 @end itemize
2455
2456 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2457 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2458 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2459 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2460 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2461 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2462 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2463
2464 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2465 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2466 preprocessed.
2467
2468 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2469 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2470 @kindex #NO_APP
2471 @kindex #APP
2472 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2473 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2474 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2475 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2476 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2477 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2478 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2479 and whitespace.
2480
2481 @node Whitespace
2482 @section Whitespace
2483
2484 @cindex whitespace
2485 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2486 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2487 people to read. Unless within character constants
2488 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2489 as exactly one space.
2490
2491 @node Comments
2492 @section Comments
2493
2494 @cindex comments
2495 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2496 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2497
2498 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2499 This means you may not nest these comments.
2500
2501 @smallexample
2502 /*
2503 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2504 is to use this sort of comment.
2505 */
2506
2507 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2508 @end smallexample
2509
2510 @cindex line comment character
2511 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2512 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2513 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2514 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2515 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2516 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2517 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2518 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2519
2520 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2521 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2522 to specify logical line numbers:
2523
2524 @kindex #
2525 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2526 @cindex logical line numbers
2527 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2528 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2529 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2530 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2531 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2532
2533 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2534 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2535
2536 @smallexample
2537 # This is an ordinary comment.
2538 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2539 # This is logical line # 36.
2540 @end smallexample
2541 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2542 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2543
2544 @node Symbol Intro
2545 @section Symbols
2546
2547 @cindex characters used in symbols
2548 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2549 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2550 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2551 @samp{_.$}.
2552 @end ifclear
2553 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2554 @ifclear GENERIC
2555 @ifset H8
2556 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2557 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2558 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2559 symbol names.)
2560 @end ifset
2561 @end ifclear
2562 @end ifset
2563 @ifset GENERIC
2564 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2565 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2566 @end ifset
2567 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2568 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2569 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2570 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2571 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2572 @cindex length of symbols
2573
2574 @node Statements
2575 @section Statements
2576
2577 @cindex statements, structure of
2578 @cindex line separator character
2579 @cindex statement separator character
2580
2581 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2582 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2583 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2584 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2585 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2586 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2587 exception: they do not end statements.
2588
2589 @cindex newline, required at file end
2590 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2591 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2592 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2593
2594 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2595
2596 @cindex instructions and directives
2597 @cindex directives and instructions
2598 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2599 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2600 @c 13feb91.
2601 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2602 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2603 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2604 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2605 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2606 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2607 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2608 @ifset GENERIC
2609 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2610 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2611 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2612 language.@refill
2613 @end ifset
2614
2615 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2616 @cindex label (@code{:})
2617 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2618 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2619 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2620
2621 @ifset HPPA
2622 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2623 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2624 only one label may be defined on each line.
2625 @end ifset
2626
2627 @smallexample
2628 label: .directive followed by something
2629 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2630 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2631 @end smallexample
2632
2633 @node Constants
2634 @section Constants
2635
2636 @cindex constants
2637 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2638 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2639 @smallexample
2640 @group
2641 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2642 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2643 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2644 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2645 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2646 @end group
2647 @end smallexample
2648
2649 @menu
2650 * Characters:: Character Constants
2651 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2652 @end menu
2653
2654 @node Characters
2655 @subsection Character Constants
2656
2657 @cindex character constants
2658 @cindex constants, character
2659 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2660 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2661 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2662 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2663 used in arithmetic expressions.
2664
2665 @menu
2666 * Strings:: Strings
2667 * Chars:: Characters
2668 @end menu
2669
2670 @node Strings
2671 @subsubsection Strings
2672
2673 @cindex string constants
2674 @cindex constants, string
2675 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2676 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2677 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2678 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2679 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2680 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2681 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2682 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2683
2684 @cindex escape codes, character
2685 @cindex character escape codes
2686 @table @kbd
2687 @c @item \a
2688 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2689 @c
2690 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2691 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2692 @item \b
2693 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2694
2695 @c @item \e
2696 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2697 @c
2698 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2699 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2700 @item \f
2701 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2702
2703 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2704 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2705 @item \n
2706 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2707
2708 @c @item \p
2709 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2710 @c
2711 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2712 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2713 @item \r
2714 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2715
2716 @c @item \s
2717 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2718 @c other assemblers.
2719 @c
2720 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2721 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2722 @item \t
2723 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2724
2725 @c @item \v
2726 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2727 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2728 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2729 @c
2730 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2731 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2732 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2733 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2734 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2735 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2736
2737 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2738 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2739 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2740 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2741 lower case @code{x} works.
2742
2743 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2744 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2745 @item \\
2746 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2747
2748 @c @item \'
2749 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2750 @c This is needed in single character literals
2751 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2752 @c a @samp{'}.
2753 @c
2754 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2755 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2756 @item \"
2757 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2758 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2759
2760 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2761 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2762 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2763 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2764 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2765 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2766 code and warns you of the fact.
2767 @end table
2768
2769 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2770 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2771 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2772 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2773 sequence.
2774
2775 @node Chars
2776 @subsubsection Characters
2777
2778 @cindex single character constant
2779 @cindex character, single
2780 @cindex constant, single character
2781 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2782 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2783 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2784 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2785 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2786 grave accent. A newline
2787 @ifclear GENERIC
2788 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2789 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2790 @end ifclear
2791 @ifset abnormal-separator
2792 @ifset H8
2793 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2794 Renesas SH)
2795 @end ifset
2796 @end ifset
2797 @end ifclear
2798 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2799 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2800 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2801 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2802 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2803
2804 @node Numbers
2805 @subsection Number Constants
2806
2807 @cindex constants, number
2808 @cindex number constants
2809 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2810 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2811 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2812 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2813 are floating point numbers, described below.
2814
2815 @menu
2816 * Integers:: Integers
2817 * Bignums:: Bignums
2818 * Flonums:: Flonums
2819 @ifclear GENERIC
2820 @ifset I960
2821 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2822 @end ifset
2823 @end ifclear
2824 @end menu
2825
2826 @node Integers
2827 @subsubsection Integers
2828 @cindex integers
2829 @cindex constants, integer
2830
2831 @cindex binary integers
2832 @cindex integers, binary
2833 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2834 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2835
2836 @cindex octal integers
2837 @cindex integers, octal
2838 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2839 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2840
2841 @cindex decimal integers
2842 @cindex integers, decimal
2843 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2844 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2845
2846 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2847 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2848 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2849 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2850
2851 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2852 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2853 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2854
2855 @node Bignums
2856 @subsubsection Bignums
2857
2858 @cindex bignums
2859 @cindex constants, bignum
2860 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2861 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2862 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2863 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2864
2865 @node Flonums
2866 @subsubsection Flonums
2867 @cindex flonums
2868 @cindex floating point numbers
2869 @cindex constants, floating point
2870
2871 @cindex precision, floating point
2872 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2873 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2874 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2875 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2876 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2877 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2878
2879 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2880 @itemize @bullet
2881 @item
2882 The digit @samp{0}.
2883 @ifset HPPA
2884 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2885 @end ifset
2886
2887 @item
2888 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2889 @ifset GENERIC
2890 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2891 @ignore
2892 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2893 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2894 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2895 @end ignore
2896
2897 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2898 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2899 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2900
2901 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2902 (in upper or lower case).
2903
2904 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2905 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2906
2907 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2908 @end ifset
2909 @ifclear GENERIC
2910 @ifset ARC
2911 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2912 @end ifset
2913 @ifset H8
2914 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2915 @end ifset
2916 @ifset HPPA
2917 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2918 @end ifset
2919 @ifset I960
2920 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2921 @end ifset
2922 @end ifclear
2923
2924 @item
2925 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2926
2927 @item
2928 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2929
2930 @item
2931 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2932 or more decimal digits.
2933
2934 @item
2935 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2936
2937 @itemize @bullet
2938 @item
2939 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2940 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2941 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2942 @item
2943 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2944 @item
2945 One or more decimal digits.
2946 @end itemize
2947
2948 @end itemize
2949
2950 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2951 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2952
2953 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2954 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2955 @command{@value{AS}}.
2956
2957 @ifclear GENERIC
2958 @ifset I960
2959 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2960 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2961 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2962 @node Bit Fields
2963 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2964
2965 @cindex bit fields
2966 @cindex constants, bit field
2967 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2968 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2969 @example
2970 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2971 @end example
2972 @noindent
2973 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2974 @var{value}.
2975
2976 The resulting number is then packed
2977 @ifset GENERIC
2978 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2979 (in host-dependent byte order)
2980 @end ifset
2981 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2982 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2983 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2984 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2985 least significant digits.@refill
2986
2987 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2988 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2989 @end ifset
2990 @end ifclear
2991
2992 @node Sections
2993 @chapter Sections and Relocation
2994 @cindex sections
2995 @cindex relocation
2996
2997 @menu
2998 * Secs Background:: Background
2999 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3000 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3001 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3002 * bss:: bss Section
3003 @end menu
3004
3005 @node Secs Background
3006 @section Background
3007
3008 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3009 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3010 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3011
3012 @cindex linker, and assembler
3013 @cindex assembler, and linker
3014 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3015 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3016 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3017 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3018 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3019 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3020 sections.
3021
3022 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3023 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3024 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3025 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3026 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3027 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3028 the proper run-time addresses.
3029 @ifset H8
3030 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3031 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3032 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3033 @end ifset
3034
3035 @cindex standard assembler sections
3036 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3037 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3038 @dfn{bss} sections.
3039
3040 @ifset COFF-ELF
3041 @ifset GENERIC
3042 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3043 @end ifset
3044 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3045 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3046 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3047 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3048 @end ifset
3049
3050 @ifset HPPA
3051 @ifset GENERIC
3052 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3053 @end ifset
3054 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3055 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3056 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3057 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3058 assembler directives.
3059
3060 @ifset SOM
3061 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3062 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3063 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3064 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3065 @end ifset
3066 @end ifset
3067
3068 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3069 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3070
3071 @ifset HPPA
3072 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3073 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3074 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3075 @end ifset
3076
3077 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3078 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3079 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3080 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3081 file is mentioned:
3082 @itemize @bullet
3083 @item
3084 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3085 an address?
3086 @item
3087 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3088 @item
3089 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3090 @display
3091 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3092 @end display
3093 @item
3094 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3095 @end itemize
3096
3097 @cindex addresses, format of
3098 @cindex section-relative addressing
3099 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3100 @display
3101 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3102 @end display
3103 @noindent
3104 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3105 nature.
3106 @ifset SOM
3107 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3108 symbol-relative instead.)
3109 @end ifset
3110
3111 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3112 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3113
3114 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3115 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3116 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3117 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3118 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3119 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3120 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3121 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3122 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3123
3124 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3125 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3126 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3127 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3128 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3129 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3130 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3131
3132 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3133 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3134 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3135 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3136 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3137 data and bss sections.
3138
3139 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3140 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3141
3142 @node Ld Sections
3143 @section Linker Sections
3144 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3145
3146 @table @strong
3147
3148 @ifset COFF-ELF
3149 @cindex named sections
3150 @cindex sections, named
3151 @item named sections
3152 @end ifset
3153 @ifset aout-bout
3154 @cindex text section
3155 @cindex data section
3156 @itemx text section
3157 @itemx data section
3158 @end ifset
3159 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3160 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3161 true of another.
3162 @c @ifset aout-bout
3163 When the program is running, however, it is
3164 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3165 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3166 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3167 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3168 in the data section.
3169 @c @end ifset
3170
3171 @cindex bss section
3172 @item bss section
3173 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3174 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3175 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3176 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3177 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3178 those explicit zeros from object files.
3179
3180 @cindex absolute section
3181 @item absolute section
3182 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3183 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3184 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3185 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3186
3187 @cindex undefined section
3188 @item undefined section
3189 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3190 the preceding sections.
3191 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3192 @end table
3193
3194 @cindex relocation example
3195 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3196 @ifset COFF-ELF
3197 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3198 @end ifset
3199 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3200
3201 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3202 @ifnottex
3203 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3204 @smallexample
3205 +-----+----+--+
3206 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3207 +-----+----+--+
3208
3209 text data bss
3210 seg. seg. seg.
3211
3212 +---+---+---+
3213 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3214 +---+---+---+
3215
3216 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3217 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3218 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3219
3220 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3221 @end smallexample
3222 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3223 @end ifnottex
3224 @need 5000
3225 @tex
3226 \bigskip
3227 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3228 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3229 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3230
3231 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3232 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3233 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3234
3235 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3236 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3237 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3238 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3239 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3240
3241 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3242 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3243
3244 @end tex
3245 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3246
3247 @node As Sections
3248 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3249
3250 @cindex internal assembler sections
3251 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3252 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3253 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3254 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3255 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3256 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3257 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3258 section-relative address.
3259
3260 @table @b
3261 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3262 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3263 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3264 bug in the assembler.
3265
3266 @cindex expr (internal section)
3267 @item expr section
3268 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3269 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3270 it in the expr section.
3271 @c FIXME item debug
3272 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3273 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3274 @c FIXME item register
3275 @end table
3276
3277 @node Sub-Sections
3278 @section Sub-Sections
3279
3280 @cindex numbered subsections
3281 @cindex grouping data
3282 @ifset aout-bout
3283 Assembled bytes
3284 @ifset COFF-ELF
3285 conventionally
3286 @end ifset
3287 fall into two sections: text and data.
3288 @end ifset
3289 You may have separate groups of
3290 @ifset GENERIC
3291 data in named sections
3292 @end ifset
3293 @ifclear GENERIC
3294 @ifclear aout-bout
3295 data in named sections
3296 @end ifclear
3297 @ifset aout-bout
3298 text or data
3299 @end ifset
3300 @end ifclear
3301 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3302 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3303 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3304 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3305 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3306 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3307 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3308 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3309 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3310 constants being output.
3311
3312 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3313 goes in subsection number zero.
3314
3315 @ifset GENERIC
3316 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3317 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3318 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3319 @end ifset
3320 @ifclear GENERIC
3321 @ifset H8
3322 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3323 boundary (two bytes).
3324 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3325 @end ifset
3326 @ifset I960
3327 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3328 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3329 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3330 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3331 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3332 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3333 @end ifset
3334 @end ifclear
3335
3336 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3337 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3338 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3339 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3340 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3341 data subsections as a data section.
3342
3343 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3344 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3345 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3346 @ifset COFF
3347 @ifset GENERIC
3348 When generating COFF output, you
3349 @end ifset
3350 @ifclear GENERIC
3351 You
3352 @end ifclear
3353 can also use an extra subsection
3354 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3355 @var{expression}}.
3356 @end ifset
3357 @ifset ELF
3358 @ifset GENERIC
3359 When generating ELF output, you
3360 @end ifset
3361 @ifclear GENERIC
3362 You
3363 @end ifclear
3364 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3365 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3366 @end ifset
3367 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3368 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3369 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3370 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3371 @smallexample
3372 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3373 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3374 .text 1
3375 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3376 .data 0
3377 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3378 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3379 .text 0
3380 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3381 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3382 @end smallexample
3383
3384 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3385 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3386 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3387 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3388 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3389 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3390 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3391
3392 @node bss
3393 @section bss Section
3394
3395 @cindex bss section
3396 @cindex common variable storage
3397 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3398 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3399 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3400 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3401 section are zeroed bytes.
3402
3403 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3404 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3405
3406 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3407 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3408
3409 @ifset GENERIC
3410 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3411 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3412 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3413 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3414 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3415 @end ifset
3416
3417 @node Symbols
3418 @chapter Symbols
3419
3420 @cindex symbols
3421 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3422 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3423 to debug.
3424
3425 @quotation
3426 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3427 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3428 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3429 @end quotation
3430
3431 @menu
3432 * Labels:: Labels
3433 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3434 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3435 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3436 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3437 @end menu
3438
3439 @node Labels
3440 @section Labels
3441
3442 @cindex labels
3443 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3444 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3445 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3446 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3447 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3448 definitions.
3449
3450 @ifset HPPA
3451 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3452 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3453 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3454 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3455 @end ifset
3456
3457 @node Setting Symbols
3458 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3459
3460 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3461 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3462 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3463 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3464 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3465 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3466 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3467 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3468
3469 @ifset Blackfin
3470 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3471 @end ifset
3472
3473 @node Symbol Names
3474 @section Symbol Names
3475
3476 @cindex symbol names
3477 @cindex names, symbol
3478 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3479 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3480 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3481 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3482 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3483 particular target machine), and underscores.
3484 @end ifclear
3485 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3486 @ifset H8
3487 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3488 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3489 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3490 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3491 @end ifset
3492 @end ifset
3493
3494 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3495 than @code{Foo}.
3496
3497 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3498 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3499 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3500 currently supported.
3501
3502 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3503 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3504 in a program.
3505
3506 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3507
3508 @cindex local symbol names
3509 @cindex symbol names, local
3510 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3511 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3512 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3513 set of local label prefixes.
3514 @ifset HPPA
3515 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3516 @end ifset
3517
3518 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3519 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3520 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3521 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3522
3523 @subheading Local Labels
3524
3525 @cindex local labels
3526 @cindex temporary symbol names
3527 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3528 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3529 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3530 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3531 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3532 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3533 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3534 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3535 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3536 for ``forwards''.
3537
3538 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3539 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3540 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3541 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3542 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3543 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3544 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3545
3546 Here is an example:
3547
3548 @smallexample
3549 1: branch 1f
3550 2: branch 1b
3551 1: branch 2f
3552 2: branch 1b
3553 @end smallexample
3554
3555 Which is the equivalent of:
3556
3557 @smallexample
3558 label_1: branch label_3
3559 label_2: branch label_1
3560 label_3: branch label_4
3561 label_4: branch label_3
3562 @end smallexample
3563
3564 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3565 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3566 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3567 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3568 these parts:
3569
3570 @table @code
3571 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3572 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3573 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3574 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3575 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3576 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3577 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3578 you may use them in debugging.
3579
3580 @item @var{number}
3581 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3582 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3583
3584 @item @kbd{C-B}
3585 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3586 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3587
3588 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3589 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3590 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3591 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3592 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3593 @end table
3594
3595 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3596 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3597
3598 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3599 @cindex dollar local symbols
3600
3601 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3602 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3603 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3604 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3605 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3606 the same local label.
3607
3608 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3609 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3610 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3611
3612 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3613 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3614 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3615 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3616
3617 @node Dot
3618 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3619
3620 @cindex dot (symbol)
3621 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3622 @cindex current address
3623 @cindex location counter
3624 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3625 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3626 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3627 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3628 directive.
3629 @ifclear no-space-dir
3630 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3631 @samp{.space 4}.
3632 @end ifclear
3633
3634 @node Symbol Attributes
3635 @section Symbol Attributes
3636
3637 @cindex symbol attributes
3638 @cindex attributes, symbol
3639 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3640 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3641 attributes.
3642 @ifset INTERNALS
3643 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3644 @end ifset
3645
3646 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3647 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3648 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3649 would want.
3650
3651 @menu
3652 * Symbol Value:: Value
3653 * Symbol Type:: Type
3654 @ifset aout-bout
3655 @ifset GENERIC
3656 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3657 @end ifset
3658 @ifclear GENERIC
3659 @ifclear BOUT
3660 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3661 @end ifclear
3662 @ifset BOUT
3663 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3664 @end ifset
3665 @end ifclear
3666 @end ifset
3667 @ifset COFF
3668 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3669 @end ifset
3670 @ifset SOM
3671 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3672 @end ifset
3673 @end menu
3674
3675 @node Symbol Value
3676 @subsection Value
3677
3678 @cindex value of a symbol
3679 @cindex symbol value
3680 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3681 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3682 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3683 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3684 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3685 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3686 called absolute.
3687
3688 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3689 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3690 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3691 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3692 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3693 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3694 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3695 allocated storage.
3696
3697 @node Symbol Type
3698 @subsection Type
3699
3700 @cindex type of a symbol
3701 @cindex symbol type
3702 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3703 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3704 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3705 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3706
3707 @ifset aout-bout
3708 @ifclear GENERIC
3709 @ifset BOUT
3710 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3711 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3712 @need 1000
3713 @node a.out Symbols
3714 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3715
3716 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3717 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3718 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3719 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3720 @code{b.out}.
3721
3722 @end ifset
3723 @ifclear BOUT
3724 @node a.out Symbols
3725 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3726
3727 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3728 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3729
3730 @end ifclear
3731 @end ifclear
3732 @ifset GENERIC
3733 @node a.out Symbols
3734 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3735
3736 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3737 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3738
3739 @end ifset
3740 @menu
3741 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3742 * Symbol Other:: Other
3743 @end menu
3744
3745 @node Symbol Desc
3746 @subsubsection Descriptor
3747
3748 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3749 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3750 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3751 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3752 @command{@value{AS}}.
3753
3754 @node Symbol Other
3755 @subsubsection Other
3756
3757 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3758 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3759 @end ifset
3760
3761 @ifset COFF
3762 @node COFF Symbols
3763 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3764
3765 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3766 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3767
3768 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3769 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3770 @code{.endef} directives.
3771
3772 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3773
3774 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3775 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3776 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3777
3778 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3779
3780 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3781 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3782 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3783 table information for COFF.
3784 @end ifset
3785
3786 @ifset SOM
3787 @node SOM Symbols
3788 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3789
3790 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3791 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3792
3793 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3794 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3795
3796 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3797 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3798 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3799 @end ifset
3800
3801 @node Expressions
3802 @chapter Expressions
3803
3804 @cindex expressions
3805 @cindex addresses
3806 @cindex numeric values
3807 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3808 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3809
3810 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3811 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3812 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3813 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3814 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3815 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3816
3817 @menu
3818 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3819 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3820 @end menu
3821
3822 @node Empty Exprs
3823 @section Empty Expressions
3824
3825 @cindex empty expressions
3826 @cindex expressions, empty
3827 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3828 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3829 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3830 is compatible with other assemblers.
3831
3832 @node Integer Exprs
3833 @section Integer Expressions
3834
3835 @cindex integer expressions
3836 @cindex expressions, integer
3837 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3838 by @emph{operators}.
3839
3840 @menu
3841 * Arguments:: Arguments
3842 * Operators:: Operators
3843 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3844 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3845 @end menu
3846
3847 @node Arguments
3848 @subsection Arguments
3849
3850 @cindex expression arguments
3851 @cindex arguments in expressions
3852 @cindex operands in expressions
3853 @cindex arithmetic operands
3854 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3855 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3856 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3857 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3858 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3859 instruction operands.
3860
3861 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3862 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3863 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3864 integer.
3865
3866 Numbers are usually integers.
3867
3868 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3869 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3870 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3871 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3872 assemblers.
3873
3874 @cindex subexpressions
3875 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3876 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3877 operator followed by an argument.
3878
3879 @node Operators
3880 @subsection Operators
3881
3882 @cindex operators, in expressions
3883 @cindex arithmetic functions
3884 @cindex functions, in expressions
3885 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3886 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3887 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3888 whitespace.
3889
3890 @node Prefix Ops
3891 @subsection Prefix Operator
3892
3893 @cindex prefix operators
3894 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3895 one argument, which must be absolute.
3896
3897 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3898 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3899 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3900 @tex
3901 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3902 @end tex
3903
3904 @table @code
3905 @item -
3906 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3907 @item ~
3908 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3909 @end table
3910
3911 @tex
3912 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3913 @end tex
3914
3915 @node Infix Ops
3916 @subsection Infix Operators
3917
3918 @cindex infix operators
3919 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3920 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3921 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3922 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3923 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3924
3925 @enumerate
3926 @cindex operator precedence
3927 @cindex precedence of operators
3928
3929 @item
3930 Highest Precedence
3931
3932 @table @code
3933 @item *
3934 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3935
3936 @item /
3937 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3938
3939 @item %
3940 @dfn{Remainder}.
3941
3942 @item <<
3943 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3944
3945 @item >>
3946 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3947 @end table
3948
3949 @item
3950 Intermediate precedence
3951
3952 @table @code
3953 @item |
3954
3955 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3956
3957 @item &
3958 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3959
3960 @item ^
3961 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3962
3963 @item !
3964 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3965 @end table
3966
3967 @item
3968 Low Precedence
3969
3970 @table @code
3971 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
3972 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
3973 @cindex arguments for addition
3974 @item +
3975 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3976 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
3977 sections.
3978
3979 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3980 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
3981 @cindex arguments for subtraction
3982 @item -
3983 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
3984 result has the section of the left argument.
3985 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3986 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3987 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3988
3989 @cindex comparison expressions
3990 @cindex expressions, comparison
3991 @item ==
3992 @dfn{Is Equal To}
3993 @item <>
3994 @itemx !=
3995 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3996 @item <
3997 @dfn{Is Less Than}
3998 @item >
3999 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4000 @item >=
4001 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4002 @item <=
4003 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4004
4005 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4006 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4007 perform signed comparisons.
4008 @end table
4009
4010 @item Lowest Precedence
4011
4012 @table @code
4013 @item &&
4014 @dfn{Logical And}.
4015
4016 @item ||
4017 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4018
4019 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4020 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4021 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4022 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4023
4024 @end table
4025 @end enumerate
4026
4027 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4028 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4029
4030 @node Pseudo Ops
4031 @chapter Assembler Directives
4032
4033 @cindex directives, machine independent
4034 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4035 @cindex machine independent directives
4036 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4037 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4038
4039 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4040 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4041 @ifset GENERIC
4042 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4043 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4044 @end ifset
4045 @ifclear GENERIC
4046 @ifset machine-directives
4047 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4048 @end ifset
4049 @end ifclear
4050
4051 @menu
4052 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4053 @ifset COFF
4054 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4055 @end ifset
4056
4057 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4058 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4059 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4060 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4061 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4062 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4063 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4064 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4065 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4066 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4067 @ifset COFF
4068 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4069 @end ifset
4070 @ifset aout-bout
4071 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4072 @end ifset
4073 @ifset COFF
4074 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4075 @end ifset
4076
4077 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4078 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4079 * Else:: @code{.else}
4080 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4081 * End:: @code{.end}
4082 @ifset COFF
4083 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4084 @end ifset
4085
4086 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4087 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4088 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4089 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4090 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4091 * Err:: @code{.err}
4092 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4093 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4094 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4095 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4096 * File:: @code{.file}
4097 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4098 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4099 * Func:: @code{.func}
4100 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4101 @ifset ELF
4102 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4103 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4104 @end ifset
4105
4106 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4107 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4108 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4109 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4110 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4111 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4112 @ifset ELF
4113 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4114 @end ifset
4115
4116 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4117 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4118 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4119 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4120 @ifclear no-line-dir
4121 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4122 @end ifclear
4123
4124 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4125 * List:: @code{.list}
4126 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4127 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4128 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4129 @ifset ELF
4130 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4131 @end ifset
4132
4133 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4134 @ignore
4135 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4136 @end ignore
4137
4138 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4139 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4140 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4141 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4142 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4143 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4144 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4145 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4146 @ifset ELF
4147 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4148 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4149 @end ifset
4150
4151 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4152 @ifset ELF
4153 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4154 @end ifset
4155
4156 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4157 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4158 @ifset ELF
4159 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4160 @end ifset
4161
4162 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4163 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4164 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4165 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4166 @ifset COFF
4167 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4168 @end ifset
4169 @ifset COFF-ELF
4170 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4171 @end ifset
4172
4173 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4174 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4175 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4176 @ifset COFF-ELF
4177 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4178 @end ifset
4179 @ifclear no-space-dir
4180 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4181 @end ifclear
4182
4183 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4184 @ifclear no-space-dir
4185 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4186 @end ifclear
4187 @ifset have-stabs
4188 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4189 @end ifset
4190
4191 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4192 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4193 @ifset ELF
4194 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4195 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4196 @end ifset
4197
4198 @ifset COFF
4199 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4200 @end ifset
4201
4202 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4203 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4204 @ifset COFF-ELF
4205 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4206 @end ifset
4207
4208 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4209 @ifset COFF
4210 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4211 @end ifset
4212
4213 @ifset ELF
4214 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4215 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4216 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4217 @end ifset
4218
4219 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4220 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4221 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4222 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4223 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4224 @end menu
4225
4226 @node Abort
4227 @section @code{.abort}
4228
4229 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4230 @cindex stopping the assembly
4231 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4232 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4233 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4234 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4235 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4236
4237 @ifset COFF
4238 @node ABORT (COFF)
4239 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4240
4241 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4242 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4243 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4244
4245 @ifset BOUT
4246 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4247 but ignores it.
4248 @end ifset
4249 @end ifset
4250
4251 @node Align
4252 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4253
4254 @cindex padding the location counter
4255 @cindex @code{align} directive
4256 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4257 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4258 required, as described below.
4259
4260 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4261 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4262 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4263 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4264 with no-op instructions.
4265
4266 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4267 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4268 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4269 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4270 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4271 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4272 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4273
4274 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4275 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4276 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4277 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4278 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4279 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4280 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4281
4282 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4283 strongarm, it is the
4284 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4285 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4286 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4287 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4288
4289 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4290 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4291 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4292 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4293 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4294
4295 @node Altmacro
4296 @section @code{.altmacro}
4297 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4298
4299 @ftable @code
4300 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4301 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4302 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4303 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4304 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4305 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4306 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4307
4308 @item String delimiters
4309 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4310 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4311
4312 @table @code
4313 @item '@var{string}'
4314 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4315
4316 @item <@var{string}>
4317 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4318 @end table
4319
4320 @item single-character string escape
4321 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4322 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4323 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4324 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4325
4326 @item Expression results as strings
4327 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4328 and use the result as a string.
4329 @end ftable
4330
4331 @node Ascii
4332 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4333
4334 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4335 @cindex string literals
4336 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4337 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4338 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4339
4340 @node Asciz
4341 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4342
4343 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4344 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4345 @cindex null-terminated strings
4346 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4347 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4348
4349 @node Balign
4350 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4351
4352 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4353 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4354 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4355 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4356 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4357 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4358 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4359
4360 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4361 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4362 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4363 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4364 with no-op instructions.
4365
4366 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4367 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4368 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4369 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4370 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4371 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4372 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4373
4374 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4375 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4376 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4377 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4378 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4379 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4380 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4381 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4382 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4383 undefined.
4384
4385 @node Bundle directives
4386 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4387 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4388 @cindex bundle
4389 @cindex instruction bundle
4390 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4391 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4392 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4393 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4394 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4395 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4396 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4397
4398 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4399 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4400 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4401 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4402 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4403 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4404 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4405 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4406 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4407 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4408 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4409
4410 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4411 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4412 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4413 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4414 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4415 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4416 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4417 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4418 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4419
4420 @cindex bundle-locked
4421 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4422 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4423 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4424 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4425 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4426 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4427 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4428 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4429 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4430 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4431 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4432 bundle size.
4433
4434 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4435 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4436 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4437 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4438 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4439 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4440
4441 @node Byte
4442 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4443
4444 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4445 @cindex integers, one byte
4446 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4447 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4448
4449 @node CFI directives
4450 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4451 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4452 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4453 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4454 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4455 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4456 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4457 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4458
4459 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4460 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4461 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4462 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4463 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4464 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4465
4466 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4467 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4468
4469 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4470 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4471 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4472 unwind entry previously opened by
4473 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4474
4475 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4476 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4477 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4478 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4479 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4480 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4481 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4482 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4483 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4484 no personality routine.
4485
4486 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4487 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4488 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4489 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4490 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4491 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4492 no LSDA.
4493
4494 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4495 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4496 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4497
4498 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4499 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4500 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4501 remains the same.
4502
4503 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4504 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4505 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4506 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4507 CFA address.
4508
4509 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4510 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4511 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4512
4513 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4514 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4515 CFA.
4516
4517 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4518 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4519 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4520 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4521 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4522 code it's annotating.
4523
4524 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4525 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4526
4527 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4528 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4529 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4530 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4531
4532 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4533 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4534
4535 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4536 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4537 i.e. no restoration needed.
4538
4539 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4540 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4541 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4542 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4543 the previous saved state.
4544
4545 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4546 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4547 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4548
4549 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4550 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4551
4552 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4553 SPARC register window has been saved.
4554
4555 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4556 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4557 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4558 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4559
4560 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4561 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4562 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4563 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4564
4565 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4566 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4567 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4568 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4569 or another register.
4570
4571 @node Comm
4572 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4573
4574 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4575 @cindex symbol, common
4576 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4577 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4578 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4579 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4580 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4581 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4582 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4583 using the largest size.
4584
4585 @ifset COFF-ELF
4586 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4587 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4588 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4589 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4590 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4591 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4592 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4593 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4594 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4595 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4596 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4597 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4598 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4599 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4600 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4601 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4602 @end ifset
4603
4604 @ifset HPPA
4605 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4606 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4607 @end ifset
4608
4609 @node Data
4610 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4611
4612 @cindex @code{data} directive
4613 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4614 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4615 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4616 to zero.
4617
4618 @ifset COFF
4619 @node Def
4620 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4621
4622 @cindex @code{def} directive
4623 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4624 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4625 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4626 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4627 @ifset BOUT
4628
4629 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4630 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4631 but ignored.
4632 @end ifset
4633 @end ifset
4634
4635 @ifset aout-bout
4636 @node Desc
4637 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4638
4639 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4640 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4641 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4642 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4643 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4644
4645 @ifset COFF
4646 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4647 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4648 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4649 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4650 @end ifset
4651 @end ifset
4652
4653 @ifset COFF
4654 @node Dim
4655 @section @code{.dim}
4656
4657 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4658 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4659 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4660 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4661 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4662 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4663 @ifset BOUT
4664
4665 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4666 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4667 ignores it.
4668 @end ifset
4669 @end ifset
4670
4671 @node Double
4672 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4673
4674 @cindex @code{double} directive
4675 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4676 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4677 assembles floating point numbers.
4678 @ifset GENERIC
4679 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4680 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4681 @end ifset
4682 @ifclear GENERIC
4683 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4684 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4685 in @sc{ieee} format.
4686 @end ifset
4687 @end ifclear
4688
4689 @node Eject
4690 @section @code{.eject}
4691
4692 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4693 @cindex new page, in listings
4694 @cindex page, in listings
4695 @cindex listing control: new page
4696 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4697
4698 @node Else
4699 @section @code{.else}
4700
4701 @cindex @code{else} directive
4702 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4703 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4704 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4705 was false.
4706
4707 @node Elseif
4708 @section @code{.elseif}
4709
4710 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4711 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4712 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4713 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4714
4715 @node End
4716 @section @code{.end}
4717
4718 @cindex @code{end} directive
4719 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4720 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4721
4722 @ifset COFF
4723 @node Endef
4724 @section @code{.endef}
4725
4726 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4727 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4728 @code{.def}.
4729 @ifset BOUT
4730
4731 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4732 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4733 directive but ignores it.
4734 @end ifset
4735 @end ifset
4736
4737 @node Endfunc
4738 @section @code{.endfunc}
4739 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4740 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4741
4742 @node Endif
4743 @section @code{.endif}
4744
4745 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4746 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4747 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4748 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4749
4750 @node Equ
4751 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4752
4753 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4754 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4755 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4756 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4757 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4758
4759 @ifset HPPA
4760 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4761 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4762 @end ifset
4763
4764 @ifset Z80
4765 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4766 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4767 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4768 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4769 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4770 @end ifset
4771
4772 @node Equiv
4773 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4774 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4775 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4776 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4777 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4778 undefined.
4779
4780 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4781 @smallexample
4782 .ifdef SYM
4783 .err
4784 .endif
4785 .equ SYM,VAL
4786 @end smallexample
4787 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4788
4789 @node Eqv
4790 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4791 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4792 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4793 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4794 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4795 value is taken.
4796
4797 @node Err
4798 @section @code{.err}
4799 @cindex @code{err} directive
4800 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4801 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4802 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4803
4804 @node Error
4805 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4806 @cindex error directive
4807
4808 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4809 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4810 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4811 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4812
4813 @smallexample
4814 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4815 @end smallexample
4816
4817 @node Exitm
4818 @section @code{.exitm}
4819 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4820
4821 @node Extern
4822 @section @code{.extern}
4823
4824 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4825 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4826 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4827 all undefined symbols as external.
4828
4829 @node Fail
4830 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4831
4832 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4833 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4834 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4835 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4836 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4837 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4838
4839 @node File
4840 @section @code{.file}
4841 @cindex @code{file} directive
4842
4843 @ifclear no-file-dir
4844 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4845 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4846 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4847
4848 @subheading Default Version
4849
4850 @cindex logical file name
4851 @cindex file name, logical
4852 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4853 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4854
4855 @smallexample
4856 .file @var{string}
4857 @end smallexample
4858
4859 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4860 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4861 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4862 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4863 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4864
4865 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4866 @end ifclear
4867
4868 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4869 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4870
4871 @smallexample
4872 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4873 @end smallexample
4874
4875 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4876 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4877 literal.
4878
4879 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4880 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4881 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4882 entries will have.
4883
4884 @node Fill
4885 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4886
4887 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4888 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4889 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4890 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4891 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4892 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4893 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4894 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4895 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4896 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4897 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4898 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4899 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4900 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4901
4902 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4903 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4904 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4905 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4906
4907 @node Float
4908 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4909
4910 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4911 @cindex @code{float} directive
4912 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4913 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4914 @ifset GENERIC
4915 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4916 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4917 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4918 @end ifset
4919 @ifclear GENERIC
4920 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4921 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4922 in @sc{ieee} format.
4923 @end ifset
4924 @end ifclear
4925
4926 @node Func
4927 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4928 @cindex @code{func} directive
4929 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4930 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4931 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4932 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4933 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4934 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4935 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4936 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4937
4938 @node Global
4939 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4940
4941 @cindex @code{global} directive
4942 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4943 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4944 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4945 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4946 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4947 from another file linked into the same program.
4948
4949 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4950 compatibility with other assemblers.
4951
4952 @ifset HPPA
4953 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4954 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4955 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4956 @end ifset
4957
4958 @ifset ELF
4959 @node Gnu_attribute
4960 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4961 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4962
4963 @node Hidden
4964 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4965
4966 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4967 @cindex visibility
4968 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4969 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4970 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4971
4972 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4973 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
4974 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4975 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4976 @end ifset
4977
4978 @node hword
4979 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4980
4981 @cindex @code{hword} directive
4982 @cindex integers, 16-bit
4983 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
4984 @cindex sixteen bit integers
4985 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4986 a 16 bit number for each.
4987
4988 @ifset GENERIC
4989 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4990 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4991 @end ifset
4992 @ifclear GENERIC
4993 @ifset W32
4994 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4995 @end ifset
4996 @ifset W16
4997 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4998 @end ifset
4999 @end ifclear
5000
5001 @node Ident
5002 @section @code{.ident}
5003
5004 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5005
5006 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5007 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5008 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5009 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5010 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5011 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5012 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5013
5014 @node If
5015 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5016
5017 @cindex conditional assembly
5018 @cindex @code{if} directive
5019 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5020 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5021 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5022 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5023 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5024 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5025 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5026 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5027
5028 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5029 @table @code
5030 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5031 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5032 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5033 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5034 is considered to be undefined.
5035
5036 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5037 @item .ifb @var{text}
5038 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5039
5040 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5041 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5042 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5043 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5044 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5045 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5046 string comparison is case sensitive.
5047
5048 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5049 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5050 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5051
5052 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5053 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5054 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5055
5056 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5057 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5058 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5059 equal to zero.
5060
5061 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5062 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5063 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5064
5065 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5066 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5067 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5068 to zero.
5069
5070 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5071 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5072 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5073
5074 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5075 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5076 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5077 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5078
5079 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5080 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5081 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5082 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5083
5084 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5085 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5086 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5087 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5088 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5089 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5090 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5091
5092 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5093 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5094 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5095 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5096
5097 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5098 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5099 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5100 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5101 @end table
5102
5103 @node Incbin
5104 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5105
5106 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5107 @cindex binary files, including
5108 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5109 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5110 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5111 around @var{file}.
5112
5113 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5114 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5115 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5116 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5117 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5118
5119 @node Include
5120 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5121
5122 @cindex @code{include} directive
5123 @cindex supporting files, including
5124 @cindex files, including
5125 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5126 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5127 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5128 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5129 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5130 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5131 around @var{file}.
5132
5133 @node Int
5134 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5135
5136 @cindex @code{int} directive
5137 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5138 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5139 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5140 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5141 of target the assembly is for.
5142
5143 @ifclear GENERIC
5144 @ifset H8
5145 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5146 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5147 32-bit integers.
5148 @end ifset
5149 @end ifclear
5150
5151 @ifset ELF
5152 @node Internal
5153 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5154
5155 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5156 @cindex visibility
5157 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5158 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5159 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5160
5161 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5162 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5163 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5164 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5165 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5166 @end ifset
5167
5168 @node Irp
5169 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5170
5171 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5172 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5173 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5174 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5175 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5176 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5177 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5178 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5179
5180 For example, assembling
5181
5182 @example
5183 .irp param,1,2,3
5184 move d\param,sp@@-
5185 .endr
5186 @end example
5187
5188 is equivalent to assembling
5189
5190 @example
5191 move d1,sp@@-
5192 move d2,sp@@-
5193 move d3,sp@@-
5194 @end example
5195
5196 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5197
5198 @node Irpc
5199 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5200
5201 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5202 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5203 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5204 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5205 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5206 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5207 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5208 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5209
5210 For example, assembling
5211
5212 @example
5213 .irpc param,123
5214 move d\param,sp@@-
5215 .endr
5216 @end example
5217
5218 is equivalent to assembling
5219
5220 @example
5221 move d1,sp@@-
5222 move d2,sp@@-
5223 move d3,sp@@-
5224 @end example
5225
5226 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5227 at @xref{Macro}.
5228
5229 @node Lcomm
5230 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5231
5232 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5233 @cindex local common symbols
5234 @cindex symbols, local common
5235 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5236 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5237 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5238 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5239 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5240 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5241
5242 @ifset GENERIC
5243 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5244 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5245 @end ifset
5246
5247 @ifset HPPA
5248 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5249 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5250 @end ifset
5251
5252 @node Lflags
5253 @section @code{.lflags}
5254
5255 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5256 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5257 assemblers, but ignores it.
5258
5259 @ifclear no-line-dir
5260 @node Line
5261 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5262
5263 @cindex @code{line} directive
5264 @cindex logical line number
5265 @ifset aout-bout
5266 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5267 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5268 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5269 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5270 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5271 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5272 @end ifset
5273
5274 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5275 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5276 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5277 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5278 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5279
5280 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5281 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5282 debugging.
5283 @end ifclear
5284
5285 @node Linkonce
5286 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5287 @cindex COMDAT
5288 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5289 @cindex common sections
5290 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5291 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5292 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5293 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5294 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5295 unique.
5296
5297 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5298 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5299 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5300
5301 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5302 following strings. For example:
5303 @smallexample
5304 .linkonce same_size
5305 @end smallexample
5306 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5307
5308 @table @code
5309 @item discard
5310 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5311
5312 @item one_only
5313 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5314
5315 @item same_size
5316 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5317
5318 @item same_contents
5319 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5320 @end table
5321
5322 @node List
5323 @section @code{.list}
5324
5325 @cindex @code{list} directive
5326 @cindex listing control, turning on
5327 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5328 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5329 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5330 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5331 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5332
5333 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5334 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5335 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5336
5337 @node Ln
5338 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5339
5340 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5341 @ifclear no-line-dir
5342 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5343 @end ifclear
5344 @ifset no-line-dir
5345 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5346 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5347 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5348 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5349 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5350 @ifset BOUT
5351
5352 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5353 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5354 output format.
5355 @end ifset
5356 @end ifset
5357
5358 @node Loc
5359 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5360 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5361 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5362 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5363 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5364 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5365 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5366 the row is added.
5367
5368 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5369
5370 @table @code
5371 @item basic_block
5372 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5373 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5374
5375 @item prologue_end
5376 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5377 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5378
5379 @item epilogue_begin
5380 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5381 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5382
5383 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5384 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5385 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5386 either 0 or 1.
5387
5388 @item isa @var{value}
5389 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5390 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5391
5392 @item discriminator @var{value}
5393 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5394 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5395
5396 @end table
5397
5398 @node Loc_mark_labels
5399 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5400 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5401 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5402 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5403 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5404 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5405 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5406 this function respectively.
5407
5408 @ifset ELF
5409 @node Local
5410 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5411
5412 @cindex @code{local} directive
5413 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5414 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5415 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5416 they will be created.
5417
5418 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5419 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5420 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5421 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5422 @end ifset
5423
5424 @node Long
5425 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5426
5427 @cindex @code{long} directive
5428 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5429
5430 @ignore
5431 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5432 @c what it really ought to do
5433 @node Lsym
5434 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5435
5436 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5437 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5438 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5439 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5440 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5441 the same as the expression value:
5442 @smallexample
5443 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5444 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5445 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5446 @end smallexample
5447 @noindent
5448 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5449 @end ignore
5450
5451 @node Macro
5452 @section @code{.macro}
5453
5454 @cindex macros
5455 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5456 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5457 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5458
5459 @example
5460 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5461 .long \from
5462 .if \to-\from
5463 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5464 .endif
5465 .endm
5466 @end example
5467
5468 @noindent
5469 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5470
5471 @example
5472 .long 0
5473 .long 1
5474 .long 2
5475 .long 3
5476 .long 4
5477 .long 5
5478 @end example
5479
5480 @ftable @code
5481 @item .macro @var{macname}
5482 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5483 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5484 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5485 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5486 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5487 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5488 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5489 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5490 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5491 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5492 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5493 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5494
5495 @table @code
5496 @item .macro comm
5497 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5498 arguments.
5499
5500 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5501 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5502 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5503 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5504 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5505
5506 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5507 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5508 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5509 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5510 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5511 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5512 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5513 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5514
5515 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5516 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5517 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5518 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5519 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5520
5521 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5522 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5523 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5524
5525 @end table
5526
5527 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5528 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5529 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5530 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5531 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5532 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5533 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5534 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5535 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5536 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5537 this macro definition:
5538
5539 @example
5540 .macro label l
5541 \l:
5542 .endm
5543 @end example
5544
5545 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5546 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5547 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5548 identifier.
5549
5550 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5551 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5552 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5553 length specifier like this:
5554
5555 @example
5556 .macro opcode base length
5557 \base.\length
5558 .endm
5559 @end example
5560
5561 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5562 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5563 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5564
5565 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5566
5567 @table @code
5568 @item Insert white space
5569 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5570 solution. eg:
5571
5572 @example
5573 .macro label l
5574 \l :
5575 .endm
5576 @end example
5577
5578 @item Use @samp{\()}
5579 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5580 the following text. eg:
5581
5582 @example
5583 .macro opcode base length
5584 \base\().\length
5585 .endm
5586 @end example
5587
5588 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5589 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5590 used as a separator. eg:
5591
5592 @example
5593 .altmacro
5594 .macro label l
5595 l&:
5596 .endm
5597 @end example
5598 @end table
5599
5600 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5601 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5602 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5603
5604 @item .endm
5605 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5606 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5607
5608 @item .exitm
5609 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5610 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5611
5612 @cindex number of macros executed
5613 @cindex macros, count executed
5614 @item \@@
5615 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5616 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5617 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5618
5619 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5620 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5621 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5622 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5623 @end ftable
5624
5625 @node MRI
5626 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5627
5628 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5629 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5630 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5631 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5632 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5633 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5634
5635 @node Noaltmacro
5636 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5637 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5638
5639 @node Nolist
5640 @section @code{.nolist}
5641
5642 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5643 @cindex listing control, turning off
5644 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5645 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5646 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5647 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5648 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5649
5650 @node Octa
5651 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5652
5653 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5654 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5655 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5656 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5657 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5658 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5659
5660 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5661 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5662
5663 @node Offset
5664 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5665
5666 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5667 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5668 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5669 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5670 directive.
5671
5672 @node Org
5673 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5674
5675 @cindex @code{org} directive
5676 @cindex location counter, advancing
5677 @cindex advancing location counter
5678 @cindex current address, advancing
5679 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5680 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5681 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5682 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5683 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5684 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5685 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5686 is the same as the current subsection.
5687
5688 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5689 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5690 backwards.
5691
5692 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5693 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5694 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5695 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5696 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5697 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5698
5699 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5700 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5701 people's assemblers.
5702
5703 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5704 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5705 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5706 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5707
5708 @node P2align
5709 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5710
5711 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5712 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5713 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5714 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5715 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5716 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5717 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5718 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5719
5720 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5721 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5722 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5723 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5724 with no-op instructions.
5725
5726 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5727 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5728 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5729 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5730 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5731 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5732 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5733
5734 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5735 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5736 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5737 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5738 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5739 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5740 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5741 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5742 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5743 undefined.
5744
5745 @ifset ELF
5746 @node PopSection
5747 @section @code{.popsection}
5748
5749 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5750 @cindex Section Stack
5751 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5752 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5753 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5754 (@pxref{Previous}).
5755
5756 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5757 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5758 stack.
5759 @end ifset
5760
5761 @ifset ELF
5762 @node Previous
5763 @section @code{.previous}
5764
5765 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5766 @cindex Section Stack
5767 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5768 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5769 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5770 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5771
5772 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5773 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5774 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5775 subsections). For example:
5776
5777 @smallexample
5778 .section A
5779 .subsection 1
5780 .word 0x1234
5781 .subsection 2
5782 .word 0x5678
5783 .previous
5784 .word 0x9abc
5785 @end smallexample
5786
5787 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5788 section A. Whilst:
5789
5790 @smallexample
5791 .section A
5792 .subsection 1
5793 # Now in section A subsection 1
5794 .word 0x1234
5795 .section B
5796 .subsection 0
5797 # Now in section B subsection 0
5798 .word 0x5678
5799 .subsection 1
5800 # Now in section B subsection 1
5801 .word 0x9abc
5802 .previous
5803 # Now in section B subsection 0
5804 .word 0xdef0
5805 @end smallexample
5806
5807 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5808 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5809
5810 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5811 the top section on the section stack.
5812 @end ifset
5813
5814 @node Print
5815 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5816
5817 @cindex @code{print} directive
5818 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5819 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5820
5821 @ifset ELF
5822 @node Protected
5823 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5824
5825 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5826 @cindex visibility
5827 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5828 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5829
5830 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5831 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5832 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5833 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5834 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5835 this.
5836 @end ifset
5837
5838 @node Psize
5839 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5840
5841 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5842 @cindex listing control: paper size
5843 @cindex paper size, for listings
5844 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5845 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5846
5847 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5848 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5849 default width is 200 columns.
5850
5851 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5852 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5853 @code{.eject}).
5854
5855 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5856 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5857
5858 @node Purgem
5859 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5860
5861 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5862 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5863 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5864
5865 @ifset ELF
5866 @node PushSection
5867 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5868
5869 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5870 @cindex Section Stack
5871 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5872 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5873 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5874 (@pxref{Previous}).
5875
5876 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5877 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5878 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5879 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5880 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5881 @end ifset
5882
5883 @node Quad
5884 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5885
5886 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5887 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5888 each bignum, it emits
5889 @ifclear bignum-16
5890 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5891 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5892 @cindex eight-byte integer
5893 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5894
5895 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5896 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5897 @end ifclear
5898 @ifset bignum-16
5899 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5900 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5901 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5902 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5903 @end ifset
5904
5905 @node Reloc
5906 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5907
5908 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5909 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5910 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5911 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5912 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5913 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5914 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5915 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5916 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5917 section.
5918
5919 @node Rept
5920 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5921
5922 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5923 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5924 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5925
5926 For example, assembling
5927
5928 @example
5929 .rept 3
5930 .long 0
5931 .endr
5932 @end example
5933
5934 is equivalent to assembling
5935
5936 @example
5937 .long 0
5938 .long 0
5939 .long 0
5940 @end example
5941
5942 @node Sbttl
5943 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5944
5945 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5946 @cindex subtitles for listings
5947 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5948 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5949 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5950
5951 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5952 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5953
5954 @ifset COFF
5955 @node Scl
5956 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5957
5958 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5959 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5960 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5961 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5962 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5963 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5964 symbolic debugging information.
5965 @ifset BOUT
5966
5967 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5968 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5969 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5970 @end ifset
5971 @end ifset
5972
5973 @ifset COFF-ELF
5974 @node Section
5975 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
5976
5977 @cindex named section
5978 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5979 named @var{name}.
5980
5981 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5982 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5983 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5984
5985 @ifset COFF
5986 @ifset ELF
5987 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5988 @subheading COFF Version
5989 @end ifset
5990
5991 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5992 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5993 ways:
5994
5995 @smallexample
5996 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5997 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5998 @end smallexample
5999
6000 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6001 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6002 @table @code
6003 @item b
6004 bss section (uninitialized data)
6005 @item n
6006 section is not loaded
6007 @item w
6008 writable section
6009 @item d
6010 data section
6011 @item e
6012 exclude section from linking
6013 @item r
6014 read-only section
6015 @item x
6016 executable section
6017 @item s
6018 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6019 @item a
6020 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6021 @item y
6022 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6023 @item 0-9
6024 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6025 @end table
6026
6027 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6028 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6029 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6030 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6031 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6032
6033 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6034 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6035 @end ifset
6036
6037 @ifset ELF
6038 @ifset COFF
6039 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6040 @subheading ELF Version
6041 @end ifset
6042
6043 @cindex Section Stack
6044 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6045 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6046 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6047 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6048
6049 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6050 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6051
6052 @smallexample
6053 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6054 @end smallexample
6055
6056 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6057 combination of the following characters:
6058 @table @code
6059 @item a
6060 section is allocatable
6061 @item e
6062 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6063 @item w
6064 section is writable
6065 @item x
6066 section is executable
6067 @item M
6068 section is mergeable
6069 @item S
6070 section contains zero terminated strings
6071 @item G
6072 section is a member of a section group
6073 @item T
6074 section is used for thread-local-storage
6075 @item ?
6076 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6077 @end table
6078
6079 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6080 @table @code
6081 @item @@progbits
6082 section contains data
6083 @item @@nobits
6084 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6085 @item @@note
6086 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6087 @item @@init_array
6088 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6089 @item @@fini_array
6090 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6091 @item @@preinit_array
6092 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6093 @end table
6094
6095 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6096
6097 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6098 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6099 @code{%} character.
6100
6101 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6102 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6103
6104 @smallexample
6105 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6106 @end smallexample
6107
6108 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6109 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6110 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6111 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6112 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6113 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6114 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6115 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6116 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6117
6118 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6119 be present along with an additional field like this:
6120
6121 @smallexample
6122 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6123 @end smallexample
6124
6125 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6126 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6127 @table @code
6128 @item comdat
6129 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6130 @item .gnu.linkonce
6131 an alias for comdat
6132 @end table
6133
6134 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6135 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6136
6137 @smallexample
6138 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6139 @end smallexample
6140
6141 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6142 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6143 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6144 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6145 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6146 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6147
6148 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6149 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6150 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6151 executable. The section will contain data.
6152
6153 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6154 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6155
6156 @smallexample
6157 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6158 @end smallexample
6159
6160 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6161 separated flags:
6162 @table @code
6163 @item #alloc
6164 section is allocatable
6165 @item #write
6166 section is writable
6167 @item #execinstr
6168 section is executable
6169 @item #exclude
6170 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6171 @item #tls
6172 section is used for thread local storage
6173 @end table
6174
6175 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6176 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6177 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6178 work.
6179 @end ifset
6180 @end ifset
6181
6182 @node Set
6183 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6184
6185 @cindex @code{set} directive
6186 @cindex symbol value, setting
6187 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6188 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6189 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6190 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6191
6192 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6193
6194 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6195 file is the last value stored into it.
6196
6197 @ifset Z80
6198 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6199 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6200 @end ifset
6201
6202 @node Short
6203 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6204
6205 @cindex @code{short} directive
6206 @ifset GENERIC
6207 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6208 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6209
6210 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6211 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6212 @end ifset
6213 @ifclear GENERIC
6214 @ifset W16
6215 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6216 @end ifset
6217 @ifset W32
6218 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6219 a 16 bit number for each.
6220 @end ifset
6221 @end ifclear
6222
6223 @node Single
6224 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6225
6226 @cindex @code{single} directive
6227 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6228 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6229 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6230 @ifset GENERIC
6231 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6232 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6233 @end ifset
6234 @ifclear GENERIC
6235 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6236 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6237 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6238 @end ifset
6239 @end ifclear
6240
6241 @ifset COFF-ELF
6242 @node Size
6243 @section @code{.size}
6244
6245 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6246
6247 @ifset COFF
6248 @ifset ELF
6249 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6250 @subheading COFF Version
6251 @end ifset
6252
6253 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6254 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6255 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6256
6257 @smallexample
6258 .size @var{expression}
6259 @end smallexample
6260
6261 @ifset BOUT
6262 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6263 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6264 ignores it.
6265 @end ifset
6266 @end ifset
6267
6268 @ifset ELF
6269 @ifset COFF
6270 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6271 @subheading ELF Version
6272 @end ifset
6273
6274 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6275 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6276
6277 @smallexample
6278 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6279 @end smallexample
6280
6281 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6282 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6283 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6284 symbols.
6285 @end ifset
6286 @end ifset
6287
6288 @ifclear no-space-dir
6289 @node Skip
6290 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6291
6292 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6293 @cindex filling memory
6294 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6295 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6296 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6297 @samp{.space}.
6298 @end ifclear
6299
6300 @node Sleb128
6301 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6302
6303 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6304 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6305 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6306 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6307
6308 @ifclear no-space-dir
6309 @node Space
6310 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6311
6312 @cindex @code{space} directive
6313 @cindex filling memory
6314 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6315 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6316 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6317 as @samp{.skip}.
6318
6319 @ifset HPPA
6320 @quotation
6321 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6322 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6323 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6324 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6325 for a summary.
6326 @end quotation
6327 @end ifset
6328 @end ifclear
6329
6330 @ifset have-stabs
6331 @node Stab
6332 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6333
6334 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6335 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6336 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6337 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6338 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6339 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6340 Up to five fields are required:
6341
6342 @table @var
6343 @item string
6344 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6345 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6346 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6347 using this field.
6348
6349 @item type
6350 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6351 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6352 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6353
6354 @item other
6355 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6356 low 8 bits of this expression.
6357
6358 @item desc
6359 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6360 bits of this expression.
6361
6362 @item value
6363 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6364 @end table
6365
6366 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6367 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6368 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6369 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6370
6371 @table @code
6372 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6373 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6374
6375 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6376 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6377 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6378 strings.
6379
6380 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6381 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6382 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6383 assembled.
6384
6385 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6386 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6387 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6388
6389 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6390 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6391 All five fields are specified.
6392 @end table
6393 @end ifset
6394 @c end have-stabs
6395
6396 @node String
6397 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6398 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6399
6400 @cindex string, copying to object file
6401 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6402 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6403 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6404 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6405 @cindex @code{string} directive
6406 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6407 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6408 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6409 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6410
6411 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6412 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6413 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6414 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6415
6416 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6417 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6418 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6419 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6420
6421 Example:
6422 @smallexample
6423 .string32 "BYE"
6424 expands to:
6425 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6426 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6427 @end smallexample
6428
6429
6430 @node Struct
6431 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6432
6433 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6434 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6435 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6436 @smallexample
6437 .struct 0
6438 field1:
6439 .struct field1 + 4
6440 field2:
6441 .struct field2 + 4
6442 field3:
6443 @end smallexample
6444 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6445 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6446 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6447 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6448 before further assembly.
6449
6450 @ifset ELF
6451 @node SubSection
6452 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6453
6454 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6455 @cindex Section Stack
6456 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6457 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6458 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6459 (@pxref{Previous}).
6460
6461 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6462 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6463 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6464 @end ifset
6465
6466 @ifset ELF
6467 @node Symver
6468 @section @code{.symver}
6469 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6470 @cindex symbol versioning
6471 @cindex versions of symbols
6472 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6473 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6474 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6475 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6476 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6477 shared library.
6478
6479 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6480 @smallexample
6481 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6482 @end smallexample
6483 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6484 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6485 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6486 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6487 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6488 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6489 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6490 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6491 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6492 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6493 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6494 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6495 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6496 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6497
6498 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6499 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6500 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6501 symbol table.
6502
6503 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6504 @smallexample
6505 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6506 @end smallexample
6507 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6508 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6509 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6510 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6511
6512 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6513 @smallexample
6514 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6515 @end smallexample
6516 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6517 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6518 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6519 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6520 @end ifset
6521
6522 @ifset COFF
6523 @node Tag
6524 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6525
6526 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6527 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6528 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6529 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6530 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6531 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6532 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6533 @ifset BOUT
6534
6535 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6536 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6537 ignores it.
6538 @end ifset
6539 @end ifset
6540
6541 @node Text
6542 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6543
6544 @cindex @code{text} directive
6545 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6546 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6547 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6548 is used.
6549
6550 @node Title
6551 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6552
6553 @cindex @code{title} directive
6554 @cindex listing control: title line
6555 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6556 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6557
6558 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6559 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6560
6561 @ifset COFF-ELF
6562 @node Type
6563 @section @code{.type}
6564
6565 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6566
6567 @ifset COFF
6568 @ifset ELF
6569 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6570 @subheading COFF Version
6571 @end ifset
6572
6573 @cindex COFF symbol type
6574 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6575 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6576 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6577 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6578
6579 @smallexample
6580 .type @var{int}
6581 @end smallexample
6582
6583 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6584 entry.
6585
6586 @ifset BOUT
6587 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6588 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6589 directive but ignores it.
6590 @end ifset
6591 @end ifset
6592
6593 @ifset ELF
6594 @ifset COFF
6595 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6596 @subheading ELF Version
6597 @end ifset
6598
6599 @cindex ELF symbol type
6600 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6601 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6602 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6603
6604 @smallexample
6605 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6606 @end smallexample
6607
6608 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6609 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6610 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6611 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6612
6613 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6614 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6615 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6616 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6617 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6618 assemblers.
6619
6620 The syntaxes supported are:
6621
6622 @smallexample
6623 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6624 .type <name>,#<type>
6625 .type <name>,@@<type>
6626 .type <name>,%<type>
6627 .type <name>,"<type>"
6628 @end smallexample
6629
6630 The types supported are:
6631
6632 @table @gcctabopt
6633 @item STT_FUNC
6634 @itemx function
6635 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6636
6637 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6638 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6639 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6640 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6641
6642 @item STT_OBJECT
6643 @itemx object
6644 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6645
6646 @item STT_TLS
6647 @itemx tls_object
6648 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6649
6650 @item STT_COMMON
6651 @itemx common
6652 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6653
6654 @item STT_NOTYPE
6655 @itemx notype
6656 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6657
6658 @item gnu_unique_object
6659 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6660 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6661 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6662 systems).
6663
6664 @end table
6665
6666 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6667
6668 @end ifset
6669 @end ifset
6670
6671 @node Uleb128
6672 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6673
6674 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6675 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6676 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6677 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6678
6679 @ifset COFF
6680 @node Val
6681 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6682
6683 @cindex @code{val} directive
6684 @cindex COFF value attribute
6685 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6686 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6687 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6688 entry.
6689 @ifset BOUT
6690
6691 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6692 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6693 @end ifset
6694 @end ifset
6695
6696 @ifset ELF
6697 @node Version
6698 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6699
6700 @cindex @code{version} directive
6701 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6702 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6703 @end ifset
6704
6705 @ifset ELF
6706 @node VTableEntry
6707 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6708
6709 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6710 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6711 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6712
6713 @node VTableInherit
6714 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6715
6716 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6717 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6718 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6719 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6720 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6721 @end ifset
6722
6723 @node Warning
6724 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6725 @cindex warning directive
6726 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6727 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6728
6729 @node Weak
6730 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6731
6732 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6733 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6734 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6735
6736 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6737 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6738 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6739
6740 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6741 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6742 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6743
6744 @node Weakref
6745 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6746
6747 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6748 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6749 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6750 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6751 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6752 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6753
6754 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6755 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6756 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6757 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6758 had the references to the alias removed.
6759
6760 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6761 within the assembler.
6762
6763 @node Word
6764 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6765
6766 @cindex @code{word} directive
6767 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6768 separated by commas.
6769 @ifclear GENERIC
6770 @ifset W32
6771 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6772 @end ifset
6773 @ifset W16
6774 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6775 @end ifset
6776 @end ifclear
6777 @ifset GENERIC
6778
6779 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6780 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6781 @end ifset
6782
6783 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6784 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6785 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6786 @cindex difference tables altered
6787 @cindex altered difference tables
6788 @quotation
6789 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6790 @end quotation
6791
6792 @ifset GENERIC
6793 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6794 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6795 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6796 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6797
6798 @end ifset
6799 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6800 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6801 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6802 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6803 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6804 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6805 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6806 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6807 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6808 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6809 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6810 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6811 @code{sym2}.
6812
6813 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6814 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6815 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6816 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6817 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6818 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6819 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6820
6821 @ifset INTERNALS
6822 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6823 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6824 assembly language programmers.
6825 @end ifset
6826 @end ifset
6827 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6828
6829 @node Deprecated
6830 @section Deprecated Directives
6831
6832 @cindex deprecated directives
6833 @cindex obsolescent directives
6834 One day these directives won't work.
6835 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6836 @table @t
6837 @item .abort
6838 @item .line
6839 @end table
6840
6841 @ifset ELF
6842 @node Object Attributes
6843 @chapter Object Attributes
6844 @cindex object attributes
6845
6846 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6847 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6848 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6849 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6850 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6851 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6852 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6853 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6854 newer generation at run-time.
6855
6856 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6857 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6858 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6859 correctly.
6860
6861 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6862 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6863 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6864 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6865 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6866 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6867
6868 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6869 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6870
6871 @menu
6872 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6873 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6874 @end menu
6875
6876 @node GNU Object Attributes
6877 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6878
6879 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6880 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6881
6882 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6883 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6884 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6885 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6886 architecture-dependent ones.
6887
6888 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6889
6890 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6891
6892 @table @r
6893 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6894 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6895 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6896 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6897 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6898 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6899 @end table
6900
6901 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6902
6903 @table @r
6904 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6905 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6906
6907 @itemize @bullet
6908 @item
6909 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6910 @item
6911 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6912 FPU.
6913 @item
6914 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6915 @item
6916 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6917 @item
6918 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6919 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6920 purpose registers.
6921 @end itemize
6922 @end table
6923
6924 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6925
6926 @table @r
6927 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6928 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6929
6930 @itemize @bullet
6931 @item
6932 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6933 @item
6934 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6935 @item
6936 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6937 @item
6938 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6939 @end itemize
6940
6941 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6942 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6943
6944 @itemize @bullet
6945 @item
6946 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6947 @item
6948 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6949 @item
6950 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6951 @item
6952 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6953 @end itemize
6954 @end table
6955
6956 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6957 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6958
6959 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6960 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6961 mailing list.
6962
6963 @itemize @bullet
6964 @item
6965 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6966 @item
6967 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6968 @item
6969 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6970 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6971 @item
6972 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6973 @item
6974 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6975 @item
6976 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6977 @end itemize
6978
6979 @end ifset
6980
6981 @ifset GENERIC
6982 @node Machine Dependencies
6983 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6984
6985 @cindex machine dependencies
6986 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6987 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
6988 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6989 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6990 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
6991 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6992 optimization.
6993
6994 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6995 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
6996 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6997
6998 @menu
6999 @ifset AARCH64
7000 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7001 @end ifset
7002 @ifset ALPHA
7003 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7004 @end ifset
7005 @ifset ARC
7006 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7007 @end ifset
7008 @ifset ARM
7009 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7010 @end ifset
7011 @ifset AVR
7012 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7013 @end ifset
7014 @ifset Blackfin
7015 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7016 @end ifset
7017 @ifset CR16
7018 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7019 @end ifset
7020 @ifset CRIS
7021 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7022 @end ifset
7023 @ifset D10V
7024 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7025 @end ifset
7026 @ifset D30V
7027 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7028 @end ifset
7029 @ifset EPIPHANY
7030 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7031 @end ifset
7032 @ifset H8/300
7033 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7034 @end ifset
7035 @ifset HPPA
7036 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7037 @end ifset
7038 @ifset I370
7039 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7040 @end ifset
7041 @ifset I80386
7042 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7043 @end ifset
7044 @ifset I860
7045 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7046 @end ifset
7047 @ifset I960
7048 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7049 @end ifset
7050 @ifset IA64
7051 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7052 @end ifset
7053 @ifset IP2K
7054 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7055 @end ifset
7056 @ifset LM32
7057 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7058 @end ifset
7059 @ifset M32C
7060 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7061 @end ifset
7062 @ifset M32R
7063 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7064 @end ifset
7065 @ifset M680X0
7066 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7067 @end ifset
7068 @ifset M68HC11
7069 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7070 @end ifset
7071 @ifset METAG
7072 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7073 @end ifset
7074 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7075 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7076 @end ifset
7077 @ifset MIPS
7078 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7079 @end ifset
7080 @ifset MMIX
7081 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7082 @end ifset
7083 @ifset MSP430
7084 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7085 @end ifset
7086 @ifset NIOSII
7087 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7088 @end ifset
7089 @ifset NS32K
7090 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7091 @end ifset
7092 @ifset SH
7093 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7094 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7095 @end ifset
7096 @ifset PDP11
7097 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7098 @end ifset
7099 @ifset PJ
7100 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7101 @end ifset
7102 @ifset PPC
7103 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7104 @end ifset
7105 @ifset RL78
7106 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7107 @end ifset
7108 @ifset RX
7109 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7110 @end ifset
7111 @ifset S390
7112 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7113 @end ifset
7114 @ifset SCORE
7115 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7116 @end ifset
7117 @ifset SPARC
7118 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7119 @end ifset
7120 @ifset TIC54X
7121 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7122 @end ifset
7123 @ifset TIC6X
7124 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7125 @end ifset
7126 @ifset TILEGX
7127 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7128 @end ifset
7129 @ifset TILEPRO
7130 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7131 @end ifset
7132 @ifset V850
7133 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7134 @end ifset
7135 @ifset XGATE
7136 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7137 @end ifset
7138 @ifset XSTORMY16
7139 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7140 @end ifset
7141 @ifset XTENSA
7142 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7143 @end ifset
7144 @ifset Z80
7145 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7146 @end ifset
7147 @ifset Z8000
7148 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7149 @end ifset
7150 @ifset VAX
7151 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7152 @end ifset
7153 @end menu
7154
7155 @lowersections
7156 @end ifset
7157
7158 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7159 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7160 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7161 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7162 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7163 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7164 @c in both conditional blocks.
7165
7166 @ifset AARCH64
7167 @include c-aarch64.texi
7168 @end ifset
7169
7170 @ifset ALPHA
7171 @include c-alpha.texi
7172 @end ifset
7173
7174 @ifset ARC
7175 @include c-arc.texi
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset ARM
7179 @include c-arm.texi
7180 @end ifset
7181
7182 @ifset AVR
7183 @include c-avr.texi
7184 @end ifset
7185
7186 @ifset Blackfin
7187 @include c-bfin.texi
7188 @end ifset
7189
7190 @ifset CR16
7191 @include c-cr16.texi
7192 @end ifset
7193
7194 @ifset CRIS
7195 @include c-cris.texi
7196 @end ifset
7197
7198 @ifset Renesas-all
7199 @ifclear GENERIC
7200 @node Machine Dependencies
7201 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7202
7203 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7204 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7205 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7206 family.
7207
7208 @menu
7209 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7210 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7211 @end menu
7212 @lowersections
7213 @end ifclear
7214 @end ifset
7215
7216 @ifset D10V
7217 @include c-d10v.texi
7218 @end ifset
7219
7220 @ifset D30V
7221 @include c-d30v.texi
7222 @end ifset
7223
7224 @ifset EPIPHANY
7225 @include c-epiphany.texi
7226 @end ifset
7227
7228 @ifset H8/300
7229 @include c-h8300.texi
7230 @end ifset
7231
7232 @ifset HPPA
7233 @include c-hppa.texi
7234 @end ifset
7235
7236 @ifset I370
7237 @include c-i370.texi
7238 @end ifset
7239
7240 @ifset I80386
7241 @include c-i386.texi
7242 @end ifset
7243
7244 @ifset I860
7245 @include c-i860.texi
7246 @end ifset
7247
7248 @ifset I960
7249 @include c-i960.texi
7250 @end ifset
7251
7252 @ifset IA64
7253 @include c-ia64.texi
7254 @end ifset
7255
7256 @ifset IP2K
7257 @include c-ip2k.texi
7258 @end ifset
7259
7260 @ifset LM32
7261 @include c-lm32.texi
7262 @end ifset
7263
7264 @ifset M32C
7265 @include c-m32c.texi
7266 @end ifset
7267
7268 @ifset M32R
7269 @include c-m32r.texi
7270 @end ifset
7271
7272 @ifset M680X0
7273 @include c-m68k.texi
7274 @end ifset
7275
7276 @ifset M68HC11
7277 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7278 @end ifset
7279
7280 @ifset METAG
7281 @include c-metag.texi
7282 @end ifset
7283
7284 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7285 @include c-microblaze.texi
7286 @end ifset
7287
7288 @ifset MIPS
7289 @include c-mips.texi
7290 @end ifset
7291
7292 @ifset MMIX
7293 @include c-mmix.texi
7294 @end ifset
7295
7296 @ifset MSP430
7297 @include c-msp430.texi
7298 @end ifset
7299
7300 @ifset NIOSII
7301 @include c-nios2.texi
7302 @end ifset
7303
7304 @ifset NS32K
7305 @include c-ns32k.texi
7306 @end ifset
7307
7308 @ifset PDP11
7309 @include c-pdp11.texi
7310 @end ifset
7311
7312 @ifset PJ
7313 @include c-pj.texi
7314 @end ifset
7315
7316 @ifset PPC
7317 @include c-ppc.texi
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @ifset RL78
7321 @include c-rl78.texi
7322 @end ifset
7323
7324 @ifset RX
7325 @include c-rx.texi
7326 @end ifset
7327
7328 @ifset S390
7329 @include c-s390.texi
7330 @end ifset
7331
7332 @ifset SCORE
7333 @include c-score.texi
7334 @end ifset
7335
7336 @ifset SH
7337 @include c-sh.texi
7338 @include c-sh64.texi
7339 @end ifset
7340
7341 @ifset SPARC
7342 @include c-sparc.texi
7343 @end ifset
7344
7345 @ifset TIC54X
7346 @include c-tic54x.texi
7347 @end ifset
7348
7349 @ifset TIC6X
7350 @include c-tic6x.texi
7351 @end ifset
7352
7353 @ifset TILEGX
7354 @include c-tilegx.texi
7355 @end ifset
7356
7357 @ifset TILEPRO
7358 @include c-tilepro.texi
7359 @end ifset
7360
7361 @ifset Z80
7362 @include c-z80.texi
7363 @end ifset
7364
7365 @ifset Z8000
7366 @include c-z8k.texi
7367 @end ifset
7368
7369 @ifset VAX
7370 @include c-vax.texi
7371 @end ifset
7372
7373 @ifset V850
7374 @include c-v850.texi
7375 @end ifset
7376
7377 @ifset XGATE
7378 @include c-xgate.texi
7379 @end ifset
7380
7381 @ifset XSTORMY16
7382 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7383 @end ifset
7384
7385 @ifset XTENSA
7386 @include c-xtensa.texi
7387 @end ifset
7388
7389 @ifset GENERIC
7390 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7391 @raisesections
7392 @end ifset
7393
7394 @node Reporting Bugs
7395 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7396 @cindex bugs in assembler
7397 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7398
7399 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7400
7401 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7402 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7403 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7404 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7405
7406 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7407 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7408
7409 @menu
7410 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7411 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7412 @end menu
7413
7414 @node Bug Criteria
7415 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7416 @cindex bug criteria
7417
7418 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7419
7420 @itemize @bullet
7421 @cindex fatal signal
7422 @cindex assembler crash
7423 @cindex crash of assembler
7424 @item
7425 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7426 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7427
7428 @cindex error on valid input
7429 @item
7430 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7431
7432 @cindex invalid input
7433 @item
7434 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7435 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7436 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7437
7438 @item
7439 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7440 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7441 @end itemize
7442
7443 @node Bug Reporting
7444 @section How to Report Bugs
7445 @cindex bug reports
7446 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7447
7448 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7449 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7450 contact that organization first.
7451
7452 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7453 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7454 distribution.
7455
7456 @ifset BUGURL
7457 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7458 to @value{BUGURL}.
7459 @end ifset
7460
7461 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7462 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7463 fact or leave it out, state it!
7464
7465 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7466 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7467 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7468 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7469 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7470 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7471 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7472 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7473 and the most helpful.
7474
7475 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7476 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7477 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7478
7479 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7480 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7481 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7482 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7483
7484 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7485
7486 @itemize @bullet
7487 @item
7488 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7489 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7490
7491 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7492 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7493
7494 @item
7495 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7496
7497 @item
7498 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7499 version number.
7500
7501 @item
7502 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7503 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7504
7505 @item
7506 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7507 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7508 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7509
7510 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7511 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7512
7513 @item
7514 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7515 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7516 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7517 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7518 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7519 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7520 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7521
7522 @item
7523 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7524 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7525
7526 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7527 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7528 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7529 make a mistake.
7530
7531 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7532 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7533 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7534 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7535 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7536 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7537 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7538 observations.
7539
7540 @item
7541 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7542 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7543 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7544 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7545 by line number.
7546
7547 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7548 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7549 @end itemize
7550
7551 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7552
7553 @itemize @bullet
7554 @item
7555 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7556
7557 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7558 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7559 changes will not affect it.
7560
7561 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7562 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7563 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7564 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7565
7566 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7567 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7568 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7569 less time, and so on.
7570
7571 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7572 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7573
7574 @item
7575 A patch for the bug.
7576
7577 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7578 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7579 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7580 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7581
7582 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7583 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7584 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7585 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7586
7587 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7588 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7589 help us to understand.
7590
7591 @item
7592 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7593
7594 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7595 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7596 @end itemize
7597
7598 @node Acknowledgements
7599 @chapter Acknowledgements
7600
7601 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7602 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7603 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7604 @c (October 2012),
7605 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7606
7607 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7608 more details?}
7609
7610 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7611 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7612 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7613
7614 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7615 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7616 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7617 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7618 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7619 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7620 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7621 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7622 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7623 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7624
7625 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7626 in format-specific I/O modules.
7627
7628 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7629 has done much work with it since.
7630
7631 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7632
7633 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7634
7635 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7636 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7637
7638 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7639 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7640 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7641 support a.out format.
7642
7643 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7644 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7645 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7646 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7647 targets.
7648
7649 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7650 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7651 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7652 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7653 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7654 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7655 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7656
7657 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7658 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7659 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7660 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7661
7662 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7663
7664 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7665
7666 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7667 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7668 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7669 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7670
7671 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7672 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7673 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7674 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7675 and some initial 64-bit support).
7676
7677 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7678
7679 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7680 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7681
7682 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7683 flavors.
7684
7685 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7686 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7687
7688 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7689 configuration enhancements.
7690
7691 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7692
7693 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7694 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7695 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7696 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7697
7698 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7699 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7700 @include fdl.texi
7701
7702 @node AS Index
7703 @unnumbered AS Index
7704
7705 @printindex cp
7706
7707 @bye
7708 @c Local Variables:
7709 @c fill-column: 79
7710 @c End:
This page took 0.183429 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.